PATENT DOCUMENT

Publication Number: US-10222980-B2
Application Number: US-201715499693-A
Country: US
Kind Code: B2

Title: Touch input cursor manipulation

Abstract:
The method for manipulating a cursor is performed at a portable multifunction device with one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. Initially, content of an electronic document is displayed on the display, where a cursor is displayed within the electronic document. Two substantially simultaneous touch inputs are then detected on the touch screen display, and preferably anywhere on the touch screen display. In response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, a portion of the content in the document closest to the cursor is selected, and the portion of the content is displayed as selected content.

Claims:
What is claimed is: 
     
       1. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions which, when executed by an electronic device with a touch-sensitive display, cause the electronic device to:
 concurrently display an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; 
 detect a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display; 
 in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, determine whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode:
 concurrently display, in the content presentation region, a first cursor at a first location and a second cursor at a second location that is different from the first location, wherein: 
 the second cursor moves in accordance with movement of the touch input while in the text selection mode; and 
 the first cursor indicates where the second cursor will be located after the touch input ends. 
 
 
     
     
       2. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the touch input including a two-finger drag gesture over the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       3. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein:
 the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display; 
 the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes an input by a contact on the onscreen keyboard, and 
 the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the contact on the onscreen keyboard having an intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold. 
 
     
     
       4. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode:
 visually obscure keys on the onscreen keyboard. 
 
 
     
     
       5. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 4 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes applying a blurring effect to the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       6. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 4 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes transforming the onscreen keyboard into an onscreen touchpad. 
     
     
       7. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 4 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes making the onscreen keyboard semitransparent to partially reveal content lying underneath the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       8. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein one of the first and second cursors is already displayed in the content presentation region before both of the first and second cursors are concurrently displayed in the content presentation region. 
     
     
       9. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 detect a lift-off of the touch input after detecting the movement of the touch input; and 
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input:
 cease to display the first cursor. 
 
 
     
     
       10. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 9 , wherein the onscreen keyboard is obscured in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and the non-transitory computer readable storage medium includes instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, restore display of the onscreen keyboard. 
 
     
     
       11. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the non-transitory computer readable storage medium includes instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in the text selection mode, detect that an intensity of a contact in the touch input exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold; 
 after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, detect movement of the contact in the touch input; 
 in response to detecting the movement of the contact in the touch input, after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold:
 select a portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input. 
 
 
     
     
       12. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 11 , wherein the selected portion of the text input begins at a position of the first cursor when the detected intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeded the predetermined intensity threshold. 
     
     
       13. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 11 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 detect lift-off of the contact in the touch input after selecting the portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input; and, 
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, confirm selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       14. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 11 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detect an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold while the portion of the text input is selected, clear selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       15. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 11 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detect an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact, confirm selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       16. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 11 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detect an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by further movement of the contact; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 clear selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
 
     
     
       17. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 16 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 start selection of a new portion of the text input in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
 
 
     
     
       18. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 16 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 further move the second cursor and the first cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
 
 
     
     
       19. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the non-transitory computer readable storage medium includes instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in the text selection mode, detect a first local intensity peak in the touch input followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input that both exceed a predetermined intensity threshold; and, 
 in response to detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak that both exceed the predetermined intensity threshold, select a first predetermined unit of the text input according to a current location of the first cursor. 
 
     
     
       20. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 19 , including instructions which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, detect a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the three consecutive local intensity peaks in the touch input that all exceed the predetermined deep press intensity threshold, select a second predetermined unit of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit of the text input. 
 
     
     
       21. An electronic device, comprising:
 a touch-sensitive display; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 concurrently displaying an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; 
 detecting a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display; 
 in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, determining whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode:
 concurrently displaying, in the content presentation region, a first cursor at a first location and a second cursor at a second location that is different from the first location wherein: 
 the second cursor moves in accordance with movement of the touch input while in the text selection mode; and 
 the first cursor indicates where the second cursor will be located after the touch input ends. 
 
 
 
     
     
       22. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the touch input including a two-finger drag gesture over the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       23. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein:
 the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display; 
 the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes an input by a contact on the onscreen keyboard, and 
 the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the contact on the onscreen keyboard having an intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold. 
 
     
     
       24. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode:
 visually obscuring keys on the onscreen keyboard. 
 
 
     
     
       25. The electronic device of  claim 24 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes applying a blurring effect to the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       26. The electronic device of  claim 24 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes transforming the onscreen keyboard into an onscreen touchpad. 
     
     
       27. The electronic device of  claim 24 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes making the onscreen keyboard semitransparent to partially reveal content lying underneath the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       28. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein one of the first and second cursors is already displayed in the content presentation region before both of the first and second cursors are concurrently displayed in the content presentation region. 
     
     
       29. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 detecting a lift-off of the touch input after detecting the movement of the touch input; and 
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input:
 ceasing to display the first cursor. 
 
 
     
     
       30. The electronic device of  claim 29 , wherein the onscreen keyboard is obscured in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and the one or more programs include instructions for:
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, restoring display of the onscreen keyboard. 
 
     
     
       31. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the one or more programs include instructions for:
 in the text selection mode, detecting that an intensity of a contact in the touch input exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold; 
 after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, detecting movement of the contact in the touch input; 
 in response to detecting the movement of the contact in the touch input, after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold:
 selecting a portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input. 
 
 
     
     
       32. The electronic device of  claim 31 , wherein the selected portion of the text input begins at a position of the first cursor when the detected intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeded the predetermined intensity threshold. 
     
     
       33. The electronic device of  claim 31 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 detecting lift-off of the contact in the touch input after selecting the portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input; and, 
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, confirming selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       34. The electronic device of  claim 31 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold while the portion of the text input is selected, clearing selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       35. The electronic device of  claim 31 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact, confirming selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       36. The electronic device of  claim 31 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by further movement of the contact; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 clearing selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
 
     
     
       37. The electronic device of  claim 36 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 starting selection of a new portion of the text input in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
 
 
     
     
       38. The electronic device of  claim 36 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 further moving the second cursor and the first cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
 
 
     
     
       39. The electronic device of  claim 21 , wherein the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the one or more programs include instructions for:
 in the text selection mode, detecting a first local intensity peak in the touch input followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input that both exceed a predetermined intensity threshold; and, 
 in response to detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak that both exceed the predetermined intensity threshold, selecting a first predetermined unit of the text input according to a current location of the first cursor. 
 
     
     
       40. The electronic device of  claim 39 , wherein the one or more programs include instructions for:
 after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, detecting a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the three consecutive local intensity peaks in the touch input that all exceed the predetermined deep press intensity threshold, selecting a second predetermined unit of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit of the text input. 
 
     
     
       41. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device having one or more processors, memory, and a touch-sensitive display:
 concurrently displaying an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; 
 detecting a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display; 
 in response to detect the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, determining whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode:
 concurrently displaying, in the content presentation region, a first cursor at a first location and a second cursor at a second location that is different from the first location, wherein:
 the second cursor moves in accordance with movement of the touch input while in the text selection mode; and 
 the first cursor indicates where the second cursor will be located after the touch input ends. 
 
 
 
 
     
     
       42. The method of  claim 41 , wherein the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the touch input including a two-finger drag gesture over the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       43. The method of  claim 41 , wherein:
 the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display; 
 the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes an input by a contact on the onscreen keyboard, and 
 the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the contact on the onscreen keyboard having an intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold. 
 
     
     
       44. The method of  claim 41 , including:
 in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode:
 visually obscuring keys on the onscreen keyboard. 
 
 
     
     
       45. The method of  claim 44 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes applying a blurring effect to the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       46. The method of  claim 44 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes transforming the onscreen keyboard into an onscreen touchpad. 
     
     
       47. The method of  claim 44 , wherein visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes making the onscreen keyboard semitransparent to partially reveal content lying underneath the onscreen keyboard. 
     
     
       48. The method of  claim 41 , wherein one of the first and second cursors is already displayed in the content presentation region before both of the first and second cursors are concurrently displayed in the content presentation region. 
     
     
       49. The method of  claim 41 , including:
 detecting a lift-off of the touch input after detecting the movement of the touch input; and 
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input:
 ceasing to display the first cursor. 
 
 
     
     
       50. The method of  claim 49 , wherein the onscreen keyboard is obscured in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and the method includes:
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, restoring display of the onscreen keyboard. 
 
     
     
       51. The method of  claim 41 , wherein the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the method includes:
 in the text selection mode, detecting that an intensity of a contact in the touch input exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold; 
 after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, detecting movement of the contact in the touch input; 
 in response to detecting the movement of the contact in the touch input, after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold:
 selecting a portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input. 
 
 
     
     
       52. The method of  claim 51 , wherein the selected portion of the text input begins at a position of the first cursor when the detected intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeded the predetermined intensity threshold. 
     
     
       53. The method of  claim 51 , including:
 detecting lift-off of the contact in the touch input after selecting the portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input; and, 
 in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, confirming selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       54. The method of  claim 51 , including:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold while the portion of the text input is selected, clearing selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       55. The method of  claim 51 , including:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact, confirming selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
     
     
       56. The method of  claim 51 , including:
 after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by further movement of the contact; and, 
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 clearing selection of the portion of the text input. 
 
 
     
     
       57. The method of  claim 56 , including:
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 starting selection of a new portion of the text input in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
 
 
     
     
       58. The method of  claim 56 , including:
 in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact:
 further moving the second cursor and the first cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
 
 
     
     
       59. The method of  claim 41 , wherein the device has one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the method includes:
 in the text selection mode, detecting a first local intensity peak in the touch input followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input that both exceed a predetermined intensity threshold; and, 
 in response to detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak that both exceed the predetermined intensity threshold, selecting a first predetermined unit of the text input according to a current location of the first cursor. 
 
     
     
       60. The method of  claim 59 , including:
 after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, detecting a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the three consecutive local intensity peaks in the touch input that all exceed the predetermined deep press intensity threshold, selecting a second predetermined unit of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit of the text input.

Description:
RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/866,361, filed Sep. 25, 2015, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/864,737 filed Sep. 24, 2015, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/135,619, filed Mar. 19, 2015, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/172,162, filed Jun. 7, 2015, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/213,593, filed Sep. 2, 2015, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/215,720, filed Sep. 8, 2015. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     This disclosure relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, and in particular to cursor manipulation and content selection in an electronic document. 
     BACKGROUND 
     The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touch pads and touch screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to review and edit electronic documents by manipulating a cursor within the electronic document presented on a display. These electronic documents are viewed or edited within applications having viewing and editing capabilities (e.g., drawing applications, presentation applications (e.g., Apple&#39;s KEYNOTE, or Microsoft&#39;s POWERPOINT), word processing applications (e.g., Apple&#39;s PAGES or Microsoft&#39;s WORD), website creation applications, spreadsheet applications (e.g., Apple&#39;s NUMBERS or Microsoft&#39;s EXCEL)). 
     Conventional cursor manipulation methods that require the use of a mouse, or other peripheral input mechanism, are relatively inefficient as they require the user to move one hand away from the keyboard to the mouse in order to make the selection. Similarly, conventional user interfaces provided on touch screen displays do not provide a simple and intuitive way to manipulate the cursor for content selection and editing. As such, it is desirable to provide a more efficient means for manipulating a cursor displayed in an electronic document presented on a touch screen display. 
     SUMMARY 
     Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for cursor manipulation and content (e.g., text) selection. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for cursor manipulation and content selection. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, a more efficient input mechanism also requires less computing resources, thereby increasing battery life of the device. 
     In order to manipulate a cursor in a document on a conventional portable multifunction device, users often need to make finger contact with precise locations on a touch sensitive screen at the location of the cursor. This is often difficult and the user cannot see the precise location of the cursor under their finger. 
     The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are addressed by the devices and methods described herein. The methods described herein allow a user manipulate a cursor and perform editing functions, such as text selection and moving a selection, from any part of the touch-sensitive surface. For example, a two-finger touch input can be detected anywhere on the touch screen, including over the keyboard. Users can greatly benefit from this for at least two reasons. First, the multi-finger gesture detection can be distinguished from a single-finger detection (e.g., single-finger taps), so that a single-finger contact or gesture at the keyboard can be reserved for other functions, e.g., text entry. Second, it allows for a more efficient user input because the user does not have to consider where the cursor gestures are being made (e.g., the user need not be concerned about inadvertent key activation) and can instead focus on the movement of the cursor. 
     In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device), while in other embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. The device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch screen display”), and in some embodiments it also includes a touchpad. 
     In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through touch inputs, including finger contacts and gestures, on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image reviewing, editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, website creation, authoring disks, spreadsheet creation or editing, playing games, using a telephone on the device, video-conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, digital photography or videography, web browsing, playing digital music or video, note taking, or the like. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of cursor manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the display; displaying a cursor within the electronic document; detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs anywhere on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs: selecting a portion of the content in the document closest to the cursor; and displaying the portion of the content as selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: while the portion of the content is displayed as selected content, detecting an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs anywhere on the touch screen display; in response to detecting the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, selecting a first expanded portion of the content that includes the portion of the content; and displaying the first expanded portion as selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: while the first expanded portion of the content is displayed as selected content, detecting an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the touch screen display; in response to detecting the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, selecting a second expanded portion of the content that includes the expanded portion of the content; and displaying the second expanded portion as selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: while the second expanded portion of the content is displayed as selected content, detecting an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the touch screen display; in response to detecting the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, selecting a third expanded portion of the content that includes the first expanded portion of the content; and displaying the third expanded portion as selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the content includes text and the portion of the content is a word located closest to the cursor in the text, the expanded portion is a sentence, the first expanded portion is a paragraph, and the second expanded cursor is a page. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the content includes text and the portion of the content is a word located closest to the cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: detecting lift-off of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs from the touch screen display, followed by an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs anywhere on the touch screen display; detecting a continuous touch gesture from locations of the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the touch screen display to additional locations on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the continuous touch gesture, expanding the selected content to include additional content beyond the portion in a direction of toward the additional locations. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: detecting a first touch input on the touch screen display at a first location within the expanded selected content; detecting, substantially simultaneous with the detection of the first touch input, a second touch input at a second location within the expanded selected content; and in response to detecting the first and second touch inputs, expanding the display of the selected content based on the selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: upon determining that the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remain in contact with the touch screen display, detecting a continuous touch gesture at least partially across the touch screen display from locations of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs; in response to the gesture, expanding the selection of the content beyond the portion of the content in a direction of the gesture. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the cursor is an insertion point. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: detecting an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the touch screen display at respective first and second locations within boundaries of the selected content; upon determining that the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remain in contact with the touch screen display, detecting a continuous touch gesture across the touch screen display; in response to detecting a lift off of the continuous touch gesture, moving the selected content to a different location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of cursor manipulation further includes: prior to moving the selected content to the second location, displaying a ghost cursor offset from the selected content, wherein the ghost selection moves with the continuous touch gesture, wherein the different location is the location of the ghost cursor at the time of the lift off. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of cursor manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the touch screen display; displaying a cursor at a current location within the content on the touch screen display; detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first region on the touch screen display; upon determining that the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remain in contact with the touch screen display, detecting a continuous touch gesture from a location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs across the touch screen display from the first region to a second region; and in response to detecting the continuous touch gesture: moving the cursor from the current location to a new location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a distance between the first region and the second region is substantially the same as a distance between the current location and the new location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: while moving the cursor, displaying a ghost cursor offset from the cursor; and upon detecting a termination of the continuous touch gesture, placing the cursor at the location of the ghost cursor and ceasing the display of the ghost cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, displaying the cursor at a current location includes displaying a selection of a portion of the content at the current location, moving the cursor from the current location to a new location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture includes: dismissing the selection and moving the cursor from the current location to the new location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of cursor manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying text on the display; displaying a cursor at a line within the text; detecting a two-finger swipe gesture on the touch screen display in a direction at least partially parallel to the line and towards an edge of the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the two-finger swipe gesture moving the cursor to a distal point of the text. For example, an end or beginning of a line or a top or bottom of a page or document. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the detecting requires that the two-finger swipe gesture be performed at a speed higher than a predetermined speed. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the distal point of the text is at a location in the direction of the gesture. For example, an end or beginning of a line or a top or bottom of a page or document. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, moving the cursor to the distal point of the text includes moving the cursor to a beginning or an end of the line of the text or a beginning or an end of the text (e.g., the top or bottom of a document or page) in accordance with the direction of the two-finger swipe. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of cursor manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the display; displaying a cursor within the electronic document; detecting a touch input on the touch screen display, wherein the touch input is located on a word within the content; and in response to detecting the touch input: selecting the word; and displaying a command display area adjacent to the selected word, wherein the second command display area includes an icon for cutting the selected word, an icon for copying the selected word, and an icon for pasting a previously selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of selection manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the display; displaying a selection of the content within the electronic document; detecting a single touch input on the touch screen display at a location over the selection; in response to detecting the single touch input at the location, displaying a set of options related to the selection; determining if the single touch input remains at the location for a predetermined amount of time followed by a continuous touch gesture away from the location on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the single touch input remaining at the location for the predetermined amount of time followed by the continuous touch gesture away from the location, moving the selection to a different location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of selection manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the display; displaying a selection of the content within the electronic document; detecting three substantially simultaneous touch inputs at locations anywhere on the touch screen display; determining if the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs is followed by three continuous touch gestures away from the locations on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the three continuous touch gestures, moving the selection to a different location in a direction of the continuous touch gestures. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of cursor manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the touch screen display, the content includes at least one line of text comprising at least two words; detecting a touch input on the content; and in response to detecting the touch input: determining a distance of the touch input to a closest space between the two words within the electronic document; and in accordance with a determination that the distance is greater than a predetermined threshold distance, selecting a word within the electronic document closest to the touch input and displaying an indication of the selection. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further places a cursor in the closest space after a preceding word when the distance is less than the predetermined threshold distance. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the predetermined threshold distance is calculated based on the percentage of the size of the word closest to the touch input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: while displaying the selection, detecting an additional touch input on the touch screen display at a location within the selection; and in response to detecting the additional touch input, dismissing the selection and placing a cursor adjacent to a word within the electronic document based on the location of the additional touch input relative to the closest space to this word. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: while displaying the selection, detecting an additional touch input on the touch screen display at a location within the selection; detecting, without breaking contact with the touch screen display following the additional touch input, a continuous touch gesture from a first location of the additional touch input on the touch screen display to a second location on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the continuous touch gesture, expanding the selection to include additional content beyond the word in a direction towards the second location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting a double-tap touch input; in response to detecting the double-tap touch input, selecting a word closest to the double-tap touch input; and displaying an indication of the selection. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting a double-tap touch input at a space between two words within the electronic document; in response to detecting the double-tap touch input, selecting the word closest to the double-tap touch input that follows the space; and displaying an indication of the selection. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting a triple-tap touch input; in response to detecting the triple-tap touch input, selecting a sentence closest to the triple-tap touch input; and displaying an indication of the selection of the sentence. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting a quadruple-tap touch input; in response to detecting the quadruple-tap touch input, selecting a paragraph closest to the quadruple-tap touch input; and displaying an indication of the selection of the paragraph. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting a quintuple-tap touch input; in response to detecting the quintuple-tap touch input, selecting the content; and displaying an indication of the selection of the content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, selecting the word within the electronic document closest to the touch input is performed when the distance is equal to the predetermined threshold distance. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, placing the cursor in the closest space after the preceding word is performed when the distance is equal to the predetermined threshold distance. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of keyboard display is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document on the touch screen display; displaying a soft keyboard on the touch screen display; detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard; and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, displaying a blurred soft keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting, without breaking contact with the touch screen display following the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, movements of the two substantially touch inputs from the soft keyboard to the content; and in response to detecting the continuous finger contact to the content, replacing display of the blurred soft keyboard with display of the soft keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, displaying the blurred soft keyboard includes changing one or more of: color, hue, saturation, brightness, and contrast of the soft keyboard based on the content of the electronic document. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of content selection is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch-sensitive display. The method includes: concurrently displaying an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; detecting a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, determining whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode; and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode: concurrently displaying, in the content presentation region, a first cursor at a first location and a second cursor at a second location that is different from the first location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the touch input including a two-finger drag gesture over the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the device has one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes an input by a contact on the onscreen keyboard, and the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the contact on the onscreen keyboard having an intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode: visually obscuring keys on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes applying a blurring effect to the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes transforming the onscreen keyboard into an onscreen touchpad. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes making the onscreen keyboard semitransparent to partially reveal content lying underneath the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the second location is based on a location of an initial contact in the touch input; and the first location is a permitted insertion position in the content presentation region that is based on the second location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the first location is an insertion position at which the first cursor is located when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode; and the second location is displaced from the first location by a predetermined offset. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, one of the first and second cursors is already displayed in the content presentation region before both of the first and second cursors are concurrently displayed in the content presentation region. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting movement of one or more contacts of the touch input; and moving the second cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the movement of the one or more contacts of the touch input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: moving the first cursor based on the movement of the second cursor, wherein movement of the first cursor includes discrete movements between permitted insertion positions in the content presentation region. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting a lift-off of the touch input after detecting the movement of the one or more contacts of the touch input; and in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input: ceasing to display the second cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, maintaining display of the first cursor at a respective permitted insertion position reached by the first cursor after the discrete movements of the first cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, ceasing to display the first cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the onscreen keyboard is obscured in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and the method further includes: in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, restoring display of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the device has one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the method further includes: in the text selection mode, detecting that an intensity of a contact in the touch input exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold; after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, detecting movement of the contact in the touch input; in response to detecting the movement of the contact in the touch input, after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold: selecting a portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the selected portion of the text input begins at a position of the first cursor when the detected intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeded the predetermined intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: detecting lift-off of the contact in the touch input after selecting the portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, confirming selection of the portion of the text input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold; and, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold while the portion of the text input is selected, clearing selection of the portion of the text input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact, confirming selection of the portion of the text input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detecting an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by further movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact: clearing selection of the portion of the text input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact: starting selection of a new portion of the text input in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact: further moving the second cursor and the first cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the further movement of the contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the device has one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the method further includes: in the text selection mode, detecting a first local intensity peak in the touch input followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input that both exceed a predetermined intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak that both exceed the predetermined intensity threshold, selecting a first predetermined unit of the text input according to a current location of the first cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, detecting a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the three consecutive local intensity peaks in the touch input that all exceed the predetermined deep press intensity threshold, selecting a second predetermined unit of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit of the text input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of content selection is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, a touch screen display, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: while a contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface, concurrently displaying on the display content and a text selection indicator at a first location within the content; detecting a first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to movement of at least a portion of the text selection indicator from the first location to a second location on the display; in response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface, selecting content between the first location and the second location; while the content between the first location and the second location is selected, detecting a second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, performing a text selection operation, associated with the content between the first location and the second location, in accordance with the second press input, wherein the contact in the first press input, the movement across the touch-sensitive surface, and the second press input is a single continuous contact with the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface includes: detecting an increase in intensity of the contact above a predetermined intensity threshold followed by detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity that remains above a predetermined minimum intensity value. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface: displaying at least the portion of the text selection indicator at the second location within the content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the text selection operation includes stopping selection of content at the second location and maintaining selection of the content between the first location and the second location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after detecting the second press input and while the content between the first location and the second location remains selected, detecting lift-off of the contact; and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact, displaying an action menu for the selected content between the first location and the second location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface and stopping the selection of the content at the second location, detecting further movement of the contact; and in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, displaying at least a portion of the text selection indicator at a third location within the content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, canceling selection of content between the first location and the second location without selecting content between the second location and the third location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the text selection operation includes cancelling selection of content between the first location and the second location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: after detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface and canceling the selection of content between the first location and the second location, detecting further movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, selecting content between the second location and a third location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: while the content between the second location and the third location is selected, detecting lift-off of the contact; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the content between the second location and the third location is selected, stopping selection of the content at the third location and maintaining selection of the content between the second location and the third location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: before displaying the text selection indicator at the first location within the content, detecting an initial press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the initial press input, displaying the text selection indicator at an initial location within the content that corresponds to a location of the initial press input on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display that includes the touch-sensitive surface, and the method further includes: concurrently displaying, on the touch-sensitive display, the content and an onscreen keyboard, wherein the initial press input is detected on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the initial press input is detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of the content on the display. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display that includes the touch-sensitive surface, and the method further includes: concurrently displaying, on the touch-sensitive display, the content and an onscreen keyboard; before displaying the text selection indicator at the first location within the content, detecting a multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard; and, in response to detecting the multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard, displaying the text selection indicator at an initial location within the content based on a location of the multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the content includes editable content and the text selection indicator includes a cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: displaying a magnifying loupe that displays a magnified version of the cursor and a region surrounding the cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, selecting the content between the first location and the second location includes: moving the cursor one character space at a time in response to detecting the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface; and selecting one additional character at a time in accordance with the movement of the cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the content includes read-only content and the text selection indicator includes a selection area; and displaying the text selection indicator at the first location includes displaying a first word located at the first location within the selection area. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: displaying a magnifying loupe that displays a magnified version of the selection area and a region surrounding the selection area. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, selecting the content between the first location and the second location includes: expanding the selection area one word at a time in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface; and selecting one additional word at a time in accordance with the expansion of the selection area. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes: foregoing performing the text selection operation, in response to detecting the second press input, in accordance with a determination that the second press input is accompanied by simultaneous movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, when the text is editable text, the text selection indicator is a cursor and selecting content between the first location and the second location includes expanding the selection character-by-character in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and when the text is non-editable text, the text selection indicator is a selection region that initially encompasses a single word and selecting content between the first location and the second location includes expanding the selection word-by-word in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of content selection is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch-sensitive display. The method includes: concurrently displaying an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; detecting a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, wherein detecting the touch input includes detecting movement of a contact and liftoff of the contact; in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display: in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies text-selection criteria, wherein the text-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a text-selection intensity threshold, performing a text selection operation based on the movement of the contact; and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies text-entry criteria, wherein the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the text-selection intensity threshold, entering text into the content presentation region based on the touch input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the liftoff of the contact is detected while the contact is at a location of a character key of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact does not move outside of the onscreen keyboard before liftoff of the contact is detected. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, entering the text into the content region includes entering a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which touchdown of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, entering the text into the content region includes entering a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which liftoff of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the text-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact does not move more than a threshold distance before detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the text-selection intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the text-selection operation includes one of: moving a cursor within the content region or selecting text within the content region. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, in response to detecting that the text-selection criteria have been met, generating a tactile output that is indicative of an entry into a text selection mode of operation. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, in response to detecting that the text-selection criteria have been met, changing an appearance of the onscreen keyboard to indicate that the device is operating in a text selection mode of operation, wherein changing the appearance of the onscreen keyboard includes obscuring an appearance of characters on keys of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, ending the text selection mode of operation and, in conjunction with the end of the text selection mode of operation, reversing the change in appearance of the onscreen keyboard to reveal the characters on the keys of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, when the touch input satisfies the text-selection criteria, detecting movement of the contact after the touch input has satisfied the text-selection criteria and moving a cursor in the content region in accordance with the movement of the contact detected after the touch input has satisfied the text-selection criteria. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, when the touch input satisfies the text-selection criteria, detecting a first subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact followed by additional movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive display; and, in response to detecting the first subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, wherein the selection-start criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-start intensity threshold, starting to select content in the content region at a location of a cursor in accordance with the additional movement of the contact; and in accordance with a determination that the touch input does not satisfy the selection-start criteria, moving the cursor in accordance with the additional movement of the contact without starting to select content in the content region. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, when the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, after starting to select content in the content region, detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive display and confirming the selection in response to detecting the liftoff of the contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, when the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, after starting to select content in the content region, and while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive display, detecting a second subsequent change in intensity of the contact; in response to detecting the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact satisfies selection-cancellation criteria, wherein the selection-cancellation criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-cancellation intensity threshold cancelling the selection; and in accordance with a determination that the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact does not satisfy the selection-cancellation criteria, maintaining the selection. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the selection-cancellation criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact moves no more than a threshold distance within a threshold amount of time before the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the selection-cancellation intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, in response to detecting that the selection-cancellation criteria have been met, generating a tactile output that is indicative of an exit from the text selection mode of operation. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, after canceling the selection, and while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive display, detecting a third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact; and, in response to detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the selection-start criteria, starting to select content in the content region at a location of the cursor; and in accordance with a determination that the touch input does not satisfy the selection-start criteria, forgoing starting to select content in the content region. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, starting to select content in response to detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact includes selecting a respective word at the location of the cursor. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the selected respective word is a first word, and the method further includes, while the first word is selected, detecting first subsequent movement of the contact; and in response to detecting the first subsequent movement of the contact while the first word is selected: in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-movement criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount, canceling selection of the first word; and selecting a second word that is adjacent to the first word in a first direction in accordance with the first subsequent movement of the contact, such that the selected respective word is the second word. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, while the respective word is selected, detecting first subsequent movement of the contact; and in response to detecting the first subsequent movement of the contact while the respective word is selected: in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount, expanding the selection to include a word that is adjacent to the respective word in a first direction in accordance with the first subsequent movement of the contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, while the respective word is selected, detecting a fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets the selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, cancelling selection of the respective word. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, while the respective word is selected, detecting a fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets sentence-selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than a threshold amount within a threshold time period before the fourth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than a delay threshold, expanding the selection to include the respective sentence that contains the respective word. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, while the respective sentence is selected, detecting second subsequent movement of the contact; and in response to detecting the second subsequent movement of the contact while the respective sentence is selected: in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount, expanding the selection to include a sentence that is adjacent to the respective sentence in a first direction in accordance with the second subsequent movement of the contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the respective sentence is selected in response to the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and the method further includes, while the respective sentence is selected: detecting a fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets the selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, cancelling selection of the respective sentence. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, in response to detecting the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets paragraph-selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period before the fifth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than the delay threshold, expanding the selection to include the respective paragraph that contains the respective sentence. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, while the respective paragraph is selected, detecting third subsequent movement of the contact; and in response to detecting the third subsequent movement of the contact while the respective paragraph is selected: in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount, expanding the selection to include a paragraph that is adjacent to the respective paragraph in a first direction in accordance with the third subsequent movement of the contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the respective paragraph is selected in response to the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and the method further includes, while the respective paragraph is selected: detecting a sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, cancelling selection of the respective paragraph. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, in response to detecting the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets document selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period before the sixth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than the delay threshold, expanding the selection to include the respective document that contains the respective paragraph. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method of content manipulation is performed at a portable multifunction device including one or more processors, memory, and a touch screen display. The method includes: displaying content of an electronic document and a cursor within the content on the touch screen display; displaying, on the touch screen display, a soft keyboard having multiple keys each having a respective alphanumeric character of a plurality of alphanumeric characters; detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard; and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, changing the appearance of the soft keyboard to a changed appearance. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: detecting, without breaking contact with the touch screen display following the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, a sliding gesture from a first location of the two substantially touch inputs on the soft keyboard to a second location on the content; and in response to detecting the sliding gesture, maintaining the changed appearance of the soft keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, changing the appearance of the soft keyboard includes: removing the plurality of alphanumeric characters from the multiple keys, or changing one or more of: color, hue, saturation, brightness, or contrast of the soft keyboard based on the content of the electronic document. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: detecting a continuous movement of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs from a first location on the soft keyboard to a second location anywhere on the touch screen display without breaking contact with the touch screen display; and expanding the selected content to include additional content beyond the portion in a direction towards the second location in response to detecting the continuous movement. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, expanding the selected content to include additional content beyond the portion in a direction towards the second location includes: displaying a start-point object and an end-point object at respective ends of the selection; and moving one of the start-point object or the end-point object in accordance with the location of the first location and the second location. For example, the selection is expanded by moving a start-point object or an end-point object like dragging a cursor. The initial direction of the continuous movement of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs defines what part of the selection is expanded. For example, a left/up movement of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs drags a lollipop shaped start-point object and expands the selection backwards, while a right/down movement of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs drags an upside down lollipop shaped end-point object and expands the selection forward. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, expanding the selected content to include additional content beyond the portion in a direction towards the second location includes: in accordance with a determination that the speed of the continuous movement exceeds a predetermined threshold, expanding the selection one word at a time. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: after detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, detecting a lift-off followed by an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs followed by a sliding gesture of the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs across the touch screen display to additional locations; dismissing the selected content; selecting a word as the selected content closest to the cursor; and expanding the selected content to include additional content beyond the selected content in a direction towards the additional locations. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: detecting an additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard; and in response to detecting the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard: in accordance with a determination that the selected content is a word, expanding the selected content to include a sentence containing the word. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: in accordance with a determination that the selected content is more than a word, displaying the cursor at the beginning of the selected content and dismissing the selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: detecting additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs; in response to detecting the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, expanding the selected content to a sentence containing the portion; and displaying an indication of the selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, expanding the selected content to a sentence containing the portion includes expanding the selected content to the sentence containing the portion in accordance with a determination that the duration between the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs and the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs is less than a predetermined threshold (e.g., 0.66 seconds). 
     In accordance with some embodiments, the method of content manipulation further includes: detecting a further two substantially simultaneous touch inputs; in response to detecting the further two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, expanding the selected content to a paragraph containing the portion; and displaying an indication of the selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, expanding the selected content to a paragraph containing the portion includes: expanding the selected content to the paragraph containing the portion in accordance with a determination that the duration between the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs and the further two substantially simultaneous touch inputs is less than a predetermined threshold (e.g., 0.66 seconds). 
     In accordance with some embodiments, there is provided an electronic device that includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, where the one or more programs include instructions for performing any of the methods described herein. 
     In accordance with some embodiments there is provided a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory. The graphical user interface includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described above, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, there is provided a non-transitory computer readable storage medium that has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform the any of the methods described herein. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor within the electronic document; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs anywhere on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs: select a portion of the content in the document closest to the cursor; and display the portion of the content as selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor at a current location within the content; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first region on the touch screen display; upon determining that the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remain in contact with the touch screen display, detect a continuous touch gesture from a location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs across the touch screen display from the first region to a second region; and in response to detecting the continuous touch gesture: move the cursor from the current location to a new location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display text and a cursor at a line within the text; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a two-finger swipe gesture on the touch screen display in a direction at least partially parallel to the line and towards an edge of the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the two-finger swipe gesture: move the cursor to a distal point of the text. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor within the electronic document; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a touch input on the touch screen display, wherein the touch input is located on a word within the content; and in response to detecting the touch input: select the word; and display a command display area adjacent to the selected word, wherein the second command display area includes an icon for cutting the selected word, an icon for copying the selected word, and an icon for pasting a previously selected content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a selection of the content within the electronic document; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a single touch input on the touch screen display at a location over the selection; in response to detecting the single touch input at the location, display a set of options related to the selection; determine if the single touch input remains at the location for a predetermined amount of time followed by a continuous touch gesture away from the location on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the single touch input remaining at the location for the predetermined amount of time followed by the continuous touch gesture away from the location, move the selection to a different location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a selection of the content within the electronic document; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect three substantially simultaneous touch inputs at locations anywhere on the touch screen display; determine if the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs is followed by three continuous touch gestures away from the locations on the touch screen display; and in response to detecting the three continuous touch gestures, move the selection to a different location in a direction of the continuous touch gestures. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document, the content includes at least one line of text comprising at least two words; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a touch input on the content; and in response to detecting the touch input: determine a distance of the touch input to a closest space between the two words within the electronic document; and in accordance with a determination that the distance is greater than a predetermined threshold distance, select a word within the electronic document closest to the touch input and display an indication of the selection. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a soft keyboard; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard; and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, display a blurred soft keyboard. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user touch inputs, a display unit configured to concurrently display an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display unit, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user touch inputs; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, determine whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode; and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode: concurrently display, in the content presentation region, a first cursor at a first location and a second cursor at a second location that is different from the first location. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user touch inputs; a display unit configured to, while a contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit, concurrently display on the display unit content and a text selection indicator at a first location within the content; one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit that corresponds to movement of at least a portion of the text selection indicator from the first location to a second location on the display unit; in response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit, select content between the first location and the second location; while the content between the first location and the second location is selected, detect a second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, perform a text selection operation, associated with the content between the first location and the second location, in accordance with the second press input, wherein the contact in the first press input, the movement across the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the second press input is a single continuous contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user touch inputs; a display unit configured to concurrently display an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the touch-sensitive display unit, wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display unit, wherein detecting the touch input includes detecting movement of a contact and liftoff of the contact; in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display: in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies text-selection criteria, wherein the text-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a text-selection intensity threshold, perform a text selection operation based on the movement of the contact; and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies text-entry criteria, wherein the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the text-selection intensity threshold, enter text into the content presentation region based on the touch input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, there is provided an electronic device that includes a display unit configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor within the electronic document; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: display, on the touch-sensitive surface display unit, a soft keyboard having multiple keys each having a respective alphanumeric character of a plurality of alphanumeric characters; detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard; and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, change the appearance of the soft keyboard to a changed appearance. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for cursor manipulation, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for cursor manipulation. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures. 
         FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 2A  is a schematic diagram of a portable multifunction device having a touch screen, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 2B  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 2C-2E  illustrate exemplary dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 3  is a schematic diagram of a user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4A  is a flow chart illustrating a method of cursor manipulation with two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4B  is a flow chart illustrating a method of cursor manipulation with a single touch input, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4C  is a flow chart illustrating a method of cursor manipulation with three substantially simultaneous touch inputs (e.g., three finger touch input), in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 5A-5AX  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for cursor manipulation, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 6A-6J  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for cursor manipulation with a single touch input, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 7A-7C  illustrate exemplary keyboard appearance changes in response to two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 8  is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 9A-9AD  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for manipulating a cursor and selecting content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 10A-10G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of manipulating a cursor in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 11A-11F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of selecting content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 12  is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 13A-13Q  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for manipulating a cursor and selecting content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 14A-14H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of manipulating a cursor and selecting content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 15  is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
     
    
    
     DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS 
     Described below are devices and methods that allow a user to efficiently manipulate a cursor in an electronic document. The methods are particularly useful on portable devices with small displays, including handheld or pocket-sized devices (e.g., smartphones). When using conventional portable devices, a user may find it difficult to precisely place her finger (or make contact) at the cursor location on the touch screen display, as the cursor is often small, hidden under the user&#39;s finger, and/or disposed between text or graphics. As such, users often need to lift their finger and reposition it multiple times until the cursor is placed at the correct location. This conventional process is time consuming, inefficient, and alienates users. The methods described herein allow a user to manipulate and place a cursor at a desired location within an electronic document, as well as perform certain editing functions, such as text selection or moving text. In some embodiments, this cursor (or selected text) manipulation can be controlled from any part of the touch-sensitive surface, not just the location of the cursor. These methods greatly reduce the number of steps that a user need perform to navigate and edit a document, thereby increasing efficiency and ease of use when performing these tasks. 
     Below,  FIGS. 1A-1B, 2A-2B, and 3  provide a description of exemplary devices.  FIGS. 5A-5AR  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for cursor manipulation when editing an electronic document.  FIGS. 4A-4C  are flow charts illustrating methods of cursor manipulation. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 5A-5AX, 6A-6J, 7A-7C, 9A-9AD, and 13A-13Q  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS. 4A-4C, 10A-10G, 11A-11F, 14A-14H  and the method recited in the claims. 
     Exemplary Devices 
     Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the present invention may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments. 
     It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the present invention. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact. 
     The terminology used in the description of the invention herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the invention. As used in the description of the invention and the appended claims, the singular forms “a”, “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. 
     As used herein, the term “if” may be construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” may be construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context. 
     Embodiments of computing devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the computing device is a portable communications device such as a mobile telephone that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the IPHONE, IPAD, and IPOD TOUCH devices from Apple Computer, Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     In the discussion that follows, a computing device that includes a touch-sensitive display is described. It should be understood, however, that the computing device may include one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a separate display, physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick. 
     The device supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video-conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a fitness application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, a digital video player application, and/or a home automation application. 
     The various applications that may be executed on the device may use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device may be adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device may support the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent. 
     The user interfaces may include one or more soft keyboard embodiments. The soft keyboard embodiments may include standard (QWERTY) and/or non-standard configurations of symbols on the displayed icons of the keyboard, such as those described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/459,606, “Keyboards For Portable Electronic Devices,” filed Jul. 24, 2006, and Ser. No. 11/459,615, “Touch Screen Keyboards For Portable Electronic Devices,” filed Jul. 24, 2006, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. The keyboard embodiments may include a reduced number of icons (or soft keys) relative to the number of keys in existing physical keyboards, such as that for a typewriter. This may make it easier for users to select one or more icons in the keyboard, and thus, one or more corresponding symbols. The keyboard embodiments may be adaptive. For example, displayed icons may be modified in accordance with user actions, such as selecting one or more icons and/or one or more corresponding symbols. One or more applications on the device may utilize common and/or different keyboard embodiments. Thus, the keyboard embodiment used may be tailored to at least some of the applications. In some embodiments, one or more keyboard embodiments may be tailored to a respective user. For example, one or more keyboard embodiments may be tailored to a respective user based on a word usage history (lexicography, slang, individual usage) of the respective user. Some of the keyboard embodiments may be adjusted to reduce a probability of a user error when selecting one or more icons, and thus one or more symbols, when using the soft keyboard embodiments. 
     Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays.  FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device  100  with touch-sensitive display system  112  in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system  112  is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device  100  includes memory  102  (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller  122 , one or more processing units (CPUs)  120 , peripherals interface  118 , RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem  106 , other input or control devices  116 , and external port  124 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more optical sensors  164 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on device  100  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100 ). Device  100  optionally includes one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs on device  100  (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100  or touchpad  355  of device  300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines  103 . 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user&#39;s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user&#39;s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user&#39;s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. 
     It should be appreciated that device  100  is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device  100  optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in  FIG. 1A  are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits. 
     Memory  102  optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory  102  by other components of device  100 , such as CPU(s)  120  and the peripherals interface  118 , is, optionally, controlled by memory controller  122 . 
     Peripherals interface  118  can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s)  120  and memory  102 . The one or more processors  120  run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory  102  to perform various functions for device  100  and to process data. 
     In some embodiments, peripherals interface  118 , CPU(s)  120 , and memory controller  122  are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip  104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips. 
     RF (radio frequency) circuitry  108  receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry  108  optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. 
     Audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , and microphone  113  provide an audio interface between a user and device  100 . Audio circuitry  110  receives audio data from peripherals interface  118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker  111 . Speaker  111  converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  also receives electrical signals converted by microphone  113  from sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface  118  for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory  102  and/or RF circuitry  108  by peripherals interface  118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry  110  also includes a headset jack (e.g.,  212 ,  FIG. 2A ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry  110  and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). 
     I/O subsystem  106  couples input/output peripherals on device  100 , such as touch-sensitive display system  112  and other input or control devices  116 , with peripherals interface  118 . I/O subsystem  106  optionally includes display controller  156 , optical sensor controller  158 , intensity sensor controller  159 , haptic feedback controller  161 , and one or more input controllers  160  for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers  160  receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices  116 . The other input or control devices  116  optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s)  160  are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g.,  208 ,  FIG. 2A ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker  111  and/or microphone  113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g.,  206 ,  FIG. 2A ). 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller  156  receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system  112 . Touch-sensitive display system  112  displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user-interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or other user interface control. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system  112  and display controller  156  (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory  102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system  112  and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system  112  and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system  112  and display controller  156  optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system  112  using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. 
     In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device  100  optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system  112  or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. 
     Device  100  also includes power system  162  for powering the various components. Power system  162  optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more optical sensors  164 .  FIG. 1A  shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller  158  in I/O subsystem  106 . Optical sensor(s)  164  optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s)  164  receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module  143  (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s)  164  optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system  112  on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user&#39;s image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165 .  FIG. 1A  shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller  159  in I/O subsystem  106 . Contact intensity sensor(s)  165  optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s)  165  receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-screen display system  112  which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors  166 .  FIG. 1A  shows proximity sensor  166  coupled with peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, proximity sensor  166  is coupled with input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system  112  when the multifunction device is placed near the user&#39;s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators  167 .  FIG. 1A  shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller  161  in I/O subsystem  106 . Tactile output generator(s)  167  optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s)  167  receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module  133  and generates tactile outputs on device  100  that are capable of being sensed by a user of device  100 . In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device  100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device  100 ). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system  112 , which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more accelerometers  168 .  FIG. 1A  shows accelerometer  168  coupled with peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, accelerometer  168  is, optionally, coupled with an input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device  100  optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s)  168 , a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device  100 . 
     In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory  102  include operating system  126 , communication module (or set of instructions)  128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions)  130 , graphics module (or set of instructions)  132 , haptic feedback module (or set of instructions)  133 , text input module (or set of instructions)  134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions)  135 , and applications (or sets of instructions)  136 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory  102  stores device/global internal state  157 , as shown in  FIGS. 1A and 3 . Device/global internal state  157  includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system  112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device&#39;s various sensors and other input or control devices  116 ; and location and/or positional information concerning the device&#39;s location and/or attitude. 
     Operating system  126  (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. 
     Communication module  128  facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports  124  and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry  108  and/or external port  124 . External port  124  (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system  112  (in conjunction with display controller  156 ) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module  130  includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module  130  receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  and display controller  156  detect contact on a touchpad. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus. 
     Graphics module  132  includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system  112  or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like. 
     In some embodiments, graphics module  132  stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module  132  receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller  156 . 
     Haptic feedback module  133  includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s)  167  to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device  100  in response to user interactions with device  100 . 
     Text input module  134 , which is, optionally, a component of graphics module  132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts  137 , e-mail  140 , IM  141 , browser  147 , and any other application that needs text input). 
     GPS module  135  determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone  138  for use in location-based dialing, to camera  143  as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). 
     Applications  136  optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
         contacts module  137  (sometimes called an address book or contact list);   telephone module  138 ;   video conferencing module  139 ;   e-mail client module  140 ;   instant messaging (IM) module  141 ;   workout support module  142 ;   camera module  143  for still and/or video images;   image management module  144 ;   browser module  147 ;   calendar module  148 ;   widget modules  149 , which optionally include one or more of: weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , dictionary widget  149 - 5 , and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   widget creator module  150  for making user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   search module  151 ;   video and music player module  152 , which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;   notes module  153 ;   map module  154 ; and/or   online video module  155 .       

     Examples of other applications  136  that are, optionally, stored in memory  102  include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , contacts module  137  includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state  192  of contacts module  137  in memory  102  or memory  370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone  138 , video conference  139 , e-mail  140 , or IM  141 ; and so forth. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , telephone module  138  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book  137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , contact list  137 , and telephone module  138 , videoconferencing module  139  includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140  includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module  144 , e-mail client module  140  makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module  143 . 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , the instant messaging module  141  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , map module  154 , and music player module  146 , workout support module  142  includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and image management module  144 , camera module  143  includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory  102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory  102 . 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and camera module  143 , image management module  144  includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , browser module  147  includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , calendar module  148  includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , widget modules  149  are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , and dictionary widget  149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget  149 - 6 ). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , the widget creator module  150  includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , search module  151  includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory  102  that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , and browser module  147 , video and music player module  152  includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system  112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port  124 ). In some embodiments, device  100  optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , notes module  153  includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , and browser module  147 , map module  154  includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , online video module  155  includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen  112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port  124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module  141 , rather than e-mail client module  140 , is used to send a link to a particular online video. 
     Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  102  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device  100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device  100  is, optionally, reduced. 
     The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device  100  to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device  100 . In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. 
       FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  (in  FIG. 1A ) includes event sorter  170  (e.g., in operating system  126 ) and a respective application  136 - 1  (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications  137 - 153 ). 
     Event sorter  170  receives event information and determines the application  136 - 1  and application view  191  of application  136 - 1  to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter  170  includes event monitor  171  and event dispatcher module  174 . In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes application internal state  192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch sensitive display  112  when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state stored in the memory  102  is used by event sorter  170  to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state  192  is used by event sorter  170  to determine application views  191  to which to deliver event information. 
     In some embodiments, application internal state  192  includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application  136 - 1  resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application  136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application  136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. 
     Event monitor  171  receives event information from peripherals interface  118 . Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display  112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface  118  transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem  106  or a sensor, such as proximity sensor  166 , accelerometer(s)  168 , and/or microphone  113  (through audio circuitry  110 ). Information that peripherals interface  118  receives from I/O subsystem  106  includes information from touch-sensitive display  112  or a touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, event monitor  171  sends requests to the peripherals interface  118  at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface  118  transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface  118  transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). 
     In some embodiments, event sorter  170  also includes a hit view determination module  172  and/or an active event recognizer determination module  173 . 
     Hit view determination module  172  provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch sensitive display  112  displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. 
     Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected may correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected may be called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs may be determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture. 
     Hit view determination module  172  receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module  172  identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view. 
     Active event recognizer determination module  173  determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. 
     Event dispatcher module  174  dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer  180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module  173 , event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module  173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module  174  stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module  182 . 
     In some embodiments, operating system  126  includes event sorter  170 . Alternatively, application  136 - 1  includes event sorter  170 . In yet other embodiments, event sorter  170  is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory  102 , such as contact/motion module  130 . 
     In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes a plurality of event handlers  190  and one or more application views  191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application&#39;s user interface. Each application view  191  of the application  136 - 1  includes one or more event recognizers  180 . Typically, a respective application view  191  includes a plurality of event recognizers  180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers  180  are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application  136 - 1  inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler  190  includes one or more of: data updater  176 , object updater  177 , GUI updater  178 , and/or event data  179  received from event sorter  170 . Event handler  190  may utilize or call data updater  176 , object updater  177  or GUI updater  178  to update the application internal state  192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views  191  includes one or more respective event handlers  190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a respective application view  191 . 
     A respective event recognizer  180  receives event information (e.g., event data  179 ) from event sorter  170 , and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer  180  includes event receiver  182  and event comparator  184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  also includes at least a subset of: metadata  183 , and event delivery instructions  188  (which may include sub-event delivery instructions). 
     Event receiver  182  receives event information from event sorter  170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch the event information may also include speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. 
     Event comparator  184  compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  includes event definitions  186 . Event definitions  186  contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event  1  ( 187 - 1 ), event  2  ( 187 - 2 ), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event  187  include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event  1  ( 187 - 1 ) is a double-tap on a displayed object. The double-tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event  2  ( 187 - 2 ) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display  112 , and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers  190 . 
     In some embodiments, event definition  187  includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display  112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display  112 , event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler  190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler  190  should be activated. For example, event comparator  184  selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. 
     In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event  187  also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer&#39;s event type. 
     When a respective event recognizer  180  determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions  186 , the respective event recognizer  180  enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  includes metadata  183  with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers may interact with one another. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  activates event handler  190  associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  delivers event information associated with the event to event handler  190 . Activating an event handler  190  is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler  190  associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. 
     In some embodiments, event delivery instructions  188  include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. 
     In some embodiments, data updater  176  creates and updates data used in application  136 - 1 . For example, data updater  176  updates the telephone number used in contacts module  137 , or stores a video file used in video and music player module  145 . In some embodiments, object updater  177  creates and updates objects used in application  136 - 1 . For example, object updater  177  creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater  178  updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater  178  prepares display information and sends it to graphics module  132  for display on a touch-sensitive display. 
     In some embodiments, event handler(s)  190  includes or has access to data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178 . In some embodiments, data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a single module of a respective application  136 - 1  or application view  191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. 
     It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices  100  with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens, e.g., coordinating mouse movement and mouse button presses with or without single or multiple keyboard presses or holds, user movements taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads, pen stylus inputs, movement of the device, oral instructions, detected eye movements, biometric inputs, and/or any combination thereof, which may be utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. 
       FIG. 2A  illustrates a portable multifunction device  100  having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ,  FIG. 1A ) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI)  200 . In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers  202  (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses  203  (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device  100 . In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button  204 . As described previously, menu button  204  is, optionally, used to navigate to any application  136  in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device  100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  includes the touch-screen display, menu button  204 , push button  206  for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s)  208 , Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot  210 , head set jack  212 , and docking/charging external port  124 . Push button  206  is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, device  100  also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone  113 . Device  100  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive display system  112  and/or one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  100 . 
       FIG. 2B  illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a touch-sensitive surface  251  (e.g., a tablet or touchpad) that is separate from the display  250 . Device  100  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors  259 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface  251  and/or one or more tactile output generators  257  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  100 . 
     Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display  112  (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in  FIG. 2B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  251  in  FIG. 2B ) has a primary axis (e.g.,  252  in  FIG. 2B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g.,  253  in  FIG. 2B ) on the display (e.g.,  250 ). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g.,  260  and  262  in  FIG. 2B ) with the touch-sensitive surface  251  at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in  FIG. 2B, 260  corresponds to  268  and  262  corresponds to  270 ). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts  260  and  262 , and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  251  in  FIG. 2B ) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g.,  250  in  FIG. 2B ) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. 
     Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. 
     As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad or touch-sensitive surface  251  in  FIG. 2B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112  in  FIG. 1A  or the touch screen in  FIG. 2A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user&#39;s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button). 
     In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device  100 ). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation. 
     In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. 
     The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D  (e.g., that is at least initially higher than I L ), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold I H  that is lower than I L )). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures. 
     In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria. 
     In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Exemplary factors are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. 
     For example,  FIG. 2C  illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold  280  that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input  276  over time. Dynamic intensity threshold  280  is a sum of two components, first component  274  that decays over time after a predefined delay time p 1  from when touch input  276  is initially detected, and second component  278  that trails the intensity of touch input  276  over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component  274  reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input  276  provides sufficient intensity. Second component  278  reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input  276  satisfies dynamic intensity threshold  280  (e.g., at point  281  in  FIG. 2C ), the “deep press” response is triggered. 
       FIG. 2D  illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold  286  (e.g., intensity threshold I D ).  FIG. 2D  also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold I H  and a second intensity threshold I L . In  FIG. 2D , although touch input  284  satisfies the first intensity threshold I H  and the second intensity threshold I L  prior to time p 2 , no response is provided until delay time p 2  has elapsed at time  282 . Also in  FIG. 2D , dynamic intensity threshold  286  decays over time, with the decay starting at time  288  after a predefined delay time p 1  has elapsed from time  282  (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold I L  was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold I D  immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold I H  or the second intensity threshold I L . 
       FIG. 2E  illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold  292  (e.g., intensity threshold I D ). In  FIG. 2E , a response associated with the intensity threshold I L  is triggered after the delay time p 2  has elapsed from when touch input  290  is initially detected. Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold  292  decays after the predefined delay time p 1  has elapsed from when touch input  290  is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity of touch input  290  after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold I L , followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input  290 , without releasing touch input  290 , can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold I D  (e.g., at time  294 ) even when the intensity of touch input  290  is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold I L . 
     An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold IT L  to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments IT 0  is zero. In some embodiments, IT 0  is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact. 
     In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). 
     In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). 
     For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met). 
       FIG. 3  is a schematic of a user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device  100 , in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces may be implemented on a desktop device  300  in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, user interface  300  includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
         Signal strength indicator(s)  302  for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;   Time  304 ;   Bluetooth indicator  305 ;   Battery status indicator  306 ;   Tray  308  with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
           Phone  138 , which may include an indicator  314  of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;   E-mail client  140 , which may include an indicator  310  of the number of unread e-mails;   Browser  147 ; and   Video and music player  145 , also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module  152 ; and   
           Icons for other applications, such as:
           IM  141 ;   Calendar  148 ;   Image management  144 ;   Camera  143 ;   Online video module  145 , also referred to as YouTube (trademark of Google Inc.) module  145 ;   Stocks  149 - 2 ;   Map  146 ;   Weather  149 - 1 ;   Dictionary  149 - 3 ;   User-Created Widget  149 - 6 ;   Notes  146 ;   Settings  312 , which provides access to settings for device  100  and its various applications  136 ;   Word processor  153 - 1 ;   Drawing  153 - 2 ;   Spreadsheet  153 - 3 ; and   Presentation  153 - 4 .   
               

     User Interfaces and Associated Processes 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of processes and associated user interfaces (“UI”) that may be implemented on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, such as the portable multifunction device  100 . 
       FIG. 4A  is a flow chart illustrating a method  400  of cursor manipulation, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  400  is performed at a portable multifunction device (e.g., the device  100  in  FIG. 1A ) with a touch screen display (e.g., the touch screen display  112  in  FIG. 1A ). As described below, the method  400  provides an expedient mechanism for selecting content at a portable multifunction device with a touch screen display. This method is both faster and easier to perform than using a peripheral device, like a mouse. The method is also intuitive to a user, thereby reducing the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from the user when selecting content, and creating a more efficient human-machine interface. A more efficient input mechanism also requires less computing resources, thereby increasing battery life of the device. 
     In some embodiments, the device  100  displays content of an electronic document on the touch screen display  112 . In some embodiments, the content comprises text (e.g., plain text, unstructured text, formatted text, or text in a web page). In other embodiments, the content comprises graphics with or without text. Moreover, the content may be editable or read-only. In addition to displaying the content, when no content is selected, the device  100  may display a cursor within the electronic document, e.g., for text entry. In some embodiments, while displaying the content of the electronic document, the device  100  detects two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at  402 . These two substantially simultaneous touch inputs can occur and be detected anywhere on the screen, including over an active virtual keyboard being displayed on the screen. 
     In some embodiments, the device  100  continuously monitors touch inputs and continuous movements of the touch inputs on the touch screen  112 . Once touch inputs are detected by the device  100 , the device  100  determines whether the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs are located on a soft keyboard on the touch screen at  406 . In response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs that started on the soft keyboard ( 406 —Yes), the device  100  displays a soft keyboard that has a changed appearance at  404 . In some embodiments, the device continuously monitors the touch inputs at step  406  so that the appearance of the keyboard remains changed when the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs that started on the soft keyboard are followed by a continuous movement of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs without breaking contact with the touch screen  112 . In other words, the device at step  406  detects whether there were two substantially simultaneous inputs on the soft keyboard either with or without a subsequent continuous movement off the keyboard. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs where not initially detected on the soft keyboard ( 406 —No), the device  100  displays a soft keyboard with an unchanged appearance at  408 , e.g., displays a regular unblurred soft keyboard or a keyboard with all alphanumeric characters displayed. A soft keyboard is a set of multiple virtual keys displayed on the screen, e.g., a QWERTY keyboard, as shown in  FIG. 13A . 
     In  FIG. 13A , the exemplary soft keyboard  1321  has multiple virtual keys and each key has a respective alphanumeric character. In addition, in some embodiments, each key has simulated three-dimensional characteristics (e.g., a three-dimensional shape, drop shadow, etc.) In some embodiments, in response to detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first location on the soft keyboard, the device  100  displays a soft keyboard with a changed appearance as shown in  FIG. 13B . In comparison with the soft keyboard with the unchanged appearance shown in  FIG. 13A , the soft keyboard  1321  with the changed appearance shown in  FIG. 13B  does not have the simulated three-dimensional characteristics (e.g., the drop shadow is removed) and the alphanumeric characters on the keys are removed. In addition, in some embodiments, the color, hue, saturation, brightness, and/or contrast of the soft keyboard  1321  is also changed (e.g., semitransparent) to indicate that the application has entered a mode that is different from a text entering mode. In the non-text entering mode, the soft keyboard is not responsive to keystrokes for text entries, but rather serves as an onscreen touchpad or track pad for moving the cursor or for selecting content. The changed keyboard appearance provides an intuitive indication that the function of the soft keyboard has changed. 
     As shown in  FIG. 13B , in some embodiments, the device  100  detects a sliding gesture  1332  starting from the first location on the soft keyboard  1321  to a second location anywhere on the touch screen  112 . The sliding gesture  1332  follows the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs without breaking contact with the touch screen  112 , e.g., it starts on the soft keyboard and moves beyond the soft keyboard  1321  into the content region  1302 . In response to detecting the sliding gesture, the device  100  maintains the changed appearance of the soft keyboard  1320  throughout the entire sliding gesture. At the end of the sliding gesture, as shown in  FIG. 13C , in response to a lift-off gesture, the device  100  displays the soft keyboard with its original unchanged appearance, e.g., with the alphanumeric characters on the virtual keys and the three-dimensional characteristics of the virtual keys and/or an unblurred the virtual keyboard. 
       FIGS. 7A-7C  illustrate exemplary user interfaces of soft keyboard appearance changes, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG. 7A , content of an electronic document is displayed on the touch screen display  112 . Also displayed on the touch screen display  112  is a soft keyboard  521  that is displayed in focus. Subsequently, the device  100  detects two substantially simultaneous touch inputs (e.g., two-finger tap)  524  on the soft keyboard  521 . In response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard  521 , the device  100  displays a blurred soft keyboard  521 , as shown in  FIG. 7B . 
     In some embodiments, instead of displaying the blurred soft keyboard, the device changes one or more of: color, hue, saturation, brightness, and contrast of the soft keyboard  521  based on the content of the electronic document. In some embodiments, the appearance of the blurred keyboard  521  is based on the content displayed and a set of control-appearance values for blur radius, saturation adjustment, opacity of a white overlay, opacity of a black overlay, opacity of user interface elements in keyboard  521 , and/or the color of text displayed in the region where the keyboard  521  is displayed. For example, in  FIG. 7B , the region where keyboard  521  is located has been blurred in accordance with a value for the blur radius, the black text color of the content  500 , etc. 
     As shown in  FIG. 7B , once the device  100  detects a continuous movement without breaking contact with the touch screen display following the two substantially simultaneous touch input from location  524 - 1  on the keyboard  521 , leaving the keyboard  521 , and moving to location  524 - 2  on the content  500  and not over the keyboard. In response, the device  100  replaces the display of the blurred soft keyboard with display of focused soft keyboard  521 , as shown in  FIG. 7C . Subsequently, as shown in  FIG. 7C , as long as the touch inputs  524  are not located on the keyboard  521 , the keyboard stays in focus. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4A , following the detection of two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, the portable multifunction device  100  determines whether prior to detecting the touch inputs, there is an existing selection of the content at  411 . By a selection it is meant that certain text, graphics, or other objects are selected (e.g., shown as highlighted text). If the device  100  does not detect an existing selection, the device  100  then determines the type of touch input at  413 . The portable multifunction device  100  can identify at least four types of the touch inputs, namely, drag, tap, hold-and-drag, and flick, among others. In some embodiments, a drag input is a sliding gesture along the surface of the touch screen. In some embodiments, a tap is a touch contact followed by a lift-off or release of contact from the surface of the touch screen, without any intervening sliding gesture detected between the touch and the lift-off. In some embodiments, a hold-and-drag is an initial touch contact, followed by a predetermined period of time greater than zero (the hold period) (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and then followed by a sliding gesture on the surface of the touch screen away from the initial point of contact, without any intervening lift-off or release of contact from the surface of the touch screen. In some embodiments, a flick is a rapid sliding gesture in a single direction along the surface of the touch screen followed by a lift-off or release of contact from the surface of the touch screen. 
     Depending on the type of the touch input received, the device  100  performs different actions. As shown in  FIG. 4A , if a drag is detected immediately after the two touch inputs are detected at  402  (e.g., with no intervening lift-off), then the device  100  moves the cursor, at  421 . In some embodiments, prior to dragging the cursor, the cursor is animated (e.g., enlarged) to clearly indicate the beginning of a cursor movement. In some embodiments, a ghost cursor is displayed while the cursor is being moved or instead of the actual cursor being moved. For example, a ghost cursor can be a cursor with a different appearance, such as a lighter colored cursor, that is offset from the cursor but linked to it, so that when the cursor moves around the screen, so does the ghost cursor. Alternatively, the ghost cursor is a lighter colored cursor, while the cursor is moved around the screen by the user, the ghost cursor shows the closest right position for the cursor, until a lift off event occurs, whereafter the real cursor replaces the ghost cursor at the position of the ghost cursor when the lift off event occurred. If a tap is detected (e.g., if after the two touch inputs are detected at  402 , a lift-off is detected without any intervening swipe gesture), then a portion of the document, such as a word, image, or other object closest to the cursor is selected, at  442 . If a hold and drag is detected (e.g., the touch inputs remain in contact with the screen without moving for a predetermined period of time before the drag gesture occurs), then the device  100  starts selecting text and/or graphics while the selection is extended in the direction of the drag gesture, at  452 . If a flick is detected, then the device  100  moves the cursor to a distal point of the text of the document, at  430 . For example, the distal point in the text is the end or beginning of a line or a top or bottom of a page or document. Examples are described in further detail below with respect to each type of touch input. 
     For example, if the type of touch input is a drag and the touch input is not located on a selection, then the device  100  moves the cursor and displays a ghost cursor at  421 .  FIG. 5A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for dragging cursor when there is no existing selection of content, in accordance with some embodiments. In this embodiment, the electronic document  500  is displayed in the user interface of an application (e.g., a word processing application  152 , a presentation application  153 , a spreadsheet application  155 , or the like). The application user interface in which document  500  is displayed may include toolbar  510  and button(s)  512  for navigating to, if any, other documents. Electronic document  500  includes content, such as text, images, objects, tables, charts, and so on. In addition to displaying the content of the electronic document, the device  100  further displays a cursor  522 - 1  within the electronic document. In some embodiments, the cursor  522 - 1  is the same as an insertion point. In some embodiments, the insertion point marker is identified by an insertion point marker  522 - 1 . 
     While document  500  is displayed in a document editing mode, keyboard  521  is also displayed. A user may enter text into document  500  by typing on keyboard  521 , and confirm completion of editing of document  500  by performing a touch input (e.g., a tap on “done” button  512 ) to exit an editing mode. 
     In some embodiments, the device  100  detects two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first region  524 - 1 ,  524 - 2  on the touch screen display  112 . The device  100  can further determine that the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remain in contact with the touch screen display  112 , and detect a continuous touch gesture or drag gesture from a location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs across the touch screen display from the first region  524 - 1 ,  524 - 2  to a second region  524 - 3 ,  524 - 3 . In response to detecting the continuous touch gesture, the device  100  moves the cursor or insertion point marker  522 - 1  across document  500  from the current location  522 - 1  in  FIG. 5A  to a new location  522 - 2  in  FIG. 5B  along a path  533  of the continuous gesture. 
       FIG. 5B  illustrates an exemplary user interface brought about by the drag gesture of  FIG. 5A , in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, as soon as the device  100  determines that there is a drag gesture ( 421  of  FIG. 4A ), it displays a ghost cursor  522 - 2  offset from the real cursor  522 - 1 . In this embodiment, when the user drags their two-fingers around the screen, both the cursor  522 - 1  and the ghost cursor  522 - 2  move together, e.g., the ghost cursor is linked to the actual cursor. The position of this ghost cursor is the position in the document where the actual cursor will be placed when the user lifts their fingers from the screen (e.g., a lift-off event of the two-fingers), e.g., while dragging, the ghost cursor  522 - 2  moves in the direction of the two-finger drag gesture, and indicates the position where the cursor  522 - 1  will be dropped or displayed when the user lifts the two fingers. In some embodiments, the ghost cursor  522 - 2  has a different appearance to the cursor  522 - 1 . For example, the ghost cursor  522 - 2  can have a different color, size, and/or shape to the cursor  522 - 1 . The ghost cursor  522 - 2  can also be animated to get the user&#39;s attention. For example, the animation of the cursor  522 - 1  can include shrinking, enlarging, rotating, blinking, and/or flipping, or the like. 
     In another embodiment, instead of moving the cursor while dragging two-fingers (e.g., a two-finger slide gesture), the ghost cursor  522 - 2  moves but not the actual cursor. In some embodiments, a distance between the first region  524 - 1 ,  524 - 2  and the second region  524 - 3 ,  524 - 4  of the touch inputs in  FIG. 5A  is substantially the same as a distance between the original location of the cursor shown in  FIG. 5A  and a new location of the cursor shown in  FIG. 5B . On release of the two-finger drag, the device  100  places the cursor  522 - 1  at the location of the ghost cursor  522 - 2 . As a result, upon detecting the termination of the continuous touch gesture, the device  100  ceases display of the ghost cursor  522 - 2 , and the insertion marker  522 - 3  replaces the ghost cursor  522 - 2 , as shown in  FIG. 5C . 
     The above examples as shown in  FIGS. 5A-5C  illustrate cursor manipulation in response to detecting a drag gesture when there is no existing selection of content. Referring back to  FIG. 4A , if there is existing selection of content in the document ( 411 —Yes) (e.g., a word is selected), then the device  100  determines if the touch inputs are located on the selection at  415 . If the device  100  determines that the touch inputs are located on the selection ( 415 —Yes), the device then determines the type of touch input at  417 . If the touch input is a drag gesture, then the device  100  dismisses the selection and moves the cursor in a direction of the drag at  433 .  FIGS. 5D-5E  illustrate exemplary user interfaces implementing step  433  in response to a drag gesture. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 5D , the device  100  detects a selection of a portion of the content  500  and displays the selection  528 . For example, the selection of “ought” from the word “brought” is highlighted as selected. In some embodiments, the device  100  displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of “ought” to indicate the selection  528 . The device  100  can detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first region  524 - 1  on the touch screen display followed by a continuous touch movement or drag gesture of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs across the touch screen display from the first region  524 - 1  to a second region  524 - 2 . The first region  524 - 1  is at least partially over the selection  528 . In response to detecting the continuous touch movement or drag gesture, the device  100  dismisses the selection  528  and moves the cursor  522  to a new location as shown in  FIG. 5E . In some embodiments, the new location is at a proximate location of the termination of the two-finger drag. 
     In some embodiments, in addition to the selection indicators  526 - 530 , the device  100  displays a command display area adjacent to the selected content  528  as shown in  FIG. 5AR  and described in greater detail below. The command display area includes affordances such as an affordance for cutting the selected content  528  and an affordance for copying the selected content  528  (e.g., “Cut” icon  542  and “Copy” icon  544  in  FIG. 5AR ). In some embodiments, the command display area is displayed every time text is selected. In some embodiments, when the text is selected by two substantially simultaneous touch inputs, the command display area is not displayed until the device  100  detects a tap on the selected text. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4A , in some embodiments, if the device  100  determines that the touch inputs are not on the selection ( 415 —No) (e.g., outside the selection), and then determines at  419  that the touch inputs are a drag gesture, then the device  100  expands the selection in accordance with the dragging gesture at  434 . 
     For example, prior to detecting touch inputs, the device  100  detects an existing selection of a portion of the content and displays the selection. The selection is highlighted, and the device  100  displays markers, such as a start-point object and an end-point object at respective ends of the selection. After displaying a soft keyboard that has a changed appearance in response to detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, the device  100  detects a continuous movement of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs from a first location on the soft keyboard to a second location anywhere on the touch screen display (e.g., within the boundaries of the soft keyboard or beyond the soft keyboard and onto the content region) without breaking contact with the touch screen display. In response to detecting the continuous movement that started on the soft keyboard outside the selected content, the device expands the selected content to include additional content beyond the portion in a direction towards the second location in response to detecting the continuous movement. 
     In some embodiments, when expanding the selected content, the selection can expand either backward or forward. The initial direction of the drag gesture determines the direction of the expansion. For example, a right and/or down continuous movement moves the end-point object right and/or down without moving the start-point object in order to expand the selection forward; while a left and/or up drag gesture moves the start-point object  530  left and/or up without moving the end-point object in order to expand the selection backward. In some embodiments, the selection expands one word at a time if the continuous movement is fast, and expands one character at a time if the continuous movement is slow. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the touch inputs are not on the selection ( 415 —No) (e.g., outside the selection) and determines at  419  that the touch inputs are a drag gesture, the device  100  dismisses the selection and moves the cursor in a direction of the drag gesture. 
       FIGS. 5A-5E  above illustrate cursor manipulation in response to detecting a drag gesture. In addition to drag, the device  100  can detect the touch inputs as a flick and perform corresponding actions. As used herein, a flick gesture is the same type of motion as a swipe gesture in that both slides the finger(s) across the touch screen display in one direction. However, different from swipe, a flick gesture is a faster movement across the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the device  100  detects a flick gesture, e.g., a swipe gesture that is performed at a speed higher than a predetermined speed, or an acceleration beyond a predetermined velocity. Referring back to  FIG. 4A , after determining that there is no selection ( 411 —No), and that the touch input is a flick gesture, the device  100  moves the cursor to a distal point of line at  430 . If the flick was up or down, the cursor would be moved to the top or bottom of a page or document, respectively.  FIGS. 5F-5G  illustrate exemplary user interfaces of moving the cursor to a distal point in the text. 
     For example, in  FIG. 5F , electronic document  500  includes content, such as text, images, objects, tables, charts, and so on is displayed on the touch screen display  112 . In addition to displaying the content of the electronic document, without detecting any existing selection, the device  100  further displays a cursor  522  within the electronic document. In some embodiments, the cursor  522  is the same as an insertion point. The insertion point marker is identified by an insertion point marker  522  placed between the letter “c” and “e” in the word “conceived”. The device  100  detects a two-finger flick gesture on the touch screen display in a direction  524  towards an edge of the touch screen display as shown, such as a left two-finger flick towards the left edge of the touch screen display  112 . In response to detecting the two-finger left flick gesture, the device  100  moves the cursor  522  to a distal point of the text, as shown in  FIG. 5G  where the cursor  522  has been moved to the beginning of the line containing the word “conceived.” If the flick was up or down, the cursor would be moved to the top or bottom of a page or document, respectively. In some embodiments, the two-finger flick gesture detected on the touch screen display  112  is in a direction along the line within the text where the cursor  522  is displayed, and the distal location of the line is at a location in the direction of the two-finger flick. In those embodiments where the flick is vertical, e.g., perpendicular to the line of text, either up or down, the cursor would be moved to the top or bottom of a page or document, respectively. 
     The above examples as shown in  FIG. 5F-5G  illustrate cursor manipulation in response to detecting a flick gesture when there is no existing selection of content. Referring back to  FIG. 4A , on the other hand, if there is existing selection of content detected by the device  100  ( 411 —Yes), then the device  100  determines if the touch inputs are located on the selection at  415 . If the device  100  determines that the touch inputs are located on the selection ( 415 —Yes), and the device determines at  417  that the touch input is a flick gesture, then the device  100  dismisses the selection and moves the cursor to the distal point (e.g., beginning or end) of the text (e.g., line, page or document) at  444 . 
     Similarly, if the device  100  determines at  415  that the touch inputs are not on the selection ( 415 —No) (e.g., outside the selection), and determines at  419  that the touch input is a flick gesture (also known as a “swipe” gesture), then the selection is again dismissed and the cursor is moved to the distal point of the text at  445 .  FIGS. 5H-5I  illustrate exemplary user interfaces implementing step  445  in response to flick. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 5H , the device  100  detects an existing selection of a portion of the content  500  and displays the selection  528 . The selection of “ought” is highlighted, and the device  100  displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of “ought” to indicate the selection  528 . The device  100  detects a two-finger flick gesture on the touch screen display in a direction  524  towards an edge of the touch screen display. In response to detecting a two-finger left flick gesture, the device  100  dismisses the selection  528  before moving the cursor  522  to a distal point of the text, such as to the beginning of the line where the cursor  522  was initially located, as shown in  FIG. 5I . 
     Though  FIGS. 5F-5I  illustrate cursor manipulation in response to a left flick or swipe, similarly, a right flick or swipe towards right edge of the touch screen display  112 , an up flick or swipe towards top edge of the touch screen display  112 , and a down flick or swipe towards bottom edge of the touch screen display  112  can be detected by the device  100 . In response to the right, up, and down flick or swipe, the device  100  moves the cursor to the end of line, beginning of page, and end of page, respectively. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4A , in addition to determining the type of touch inputs as drag and flick, the device  100  can detect the type of touch inputs as tap and perform corresponding actions. After determining the type of the touch inputs is tap and the touch inputs that are not located on a selection, the device  100  selects the closest word to the cursor at  442 .  FIGS. 5I-5P  illustrate exemplary user interfaces of selecting the closest word to the cursor in step  442 . 
     For example, in  FIG. 5J , electronic document  500  is displayed in the user interface of an application (e.g., a word processing application  152 , a presentation application  153 , a spreadsheet application  155 , etc.). The application user interface in which document  500  is displayed may include toolbar  510  and button  512  for navigating to, if any, other documents. Electronic document  500  includes content, such as text, images, objects, tables, charts, and so on. In addition to displaying the content of the electronic document, the device  100  further displays a cursor  522  within the electronic document. In some embodiments, the cursor  522  is the same as an insertion point. The cursor  522  indicates the insertion point in the electronic document  500  as on a word “score”, between the character “s” and “c” of the word “score”. 
     Subsequently, while displaying the content of the document  500 , and when there is no existing selection ( 411 —No of  FIG. 4A ), the device  100  detects two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  that are not located on a selection ( 442  of  FIG. 4A ). Turning to  FIG. 5K , in response to detecting the touch inputs, the device  100  determines the touch inputs are not located on a selection, and selects the word “score”, since it is the closest to the cursor  522 . The selection of the word “score” is displayed and highlighted, and the device  100  displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of “score” to indicate the selection  528 . 
     In some embodiments, a word is selected if the cursor  522  is within the word (e.g., the word “score” in  FIGS. 5J-5K ), adjacent to the first letter of the word (e.g., the word “Four” in  FIGS. 5L-5M ), or adjacent to the last letter of the word (e.g., the word “forth” in  FIGS. 5N-5O ). In some embodiments, the closest word and any punctuation and/or spaces are selected if the cursor  522  is currently located after a sentence and not within a word or adjacent to the first or last letter of a word (e.g., “equal.” in  FIGS. 5P-5Q ). 
     It should be noted that in  FIGS. 5J-5P , the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  can be located anywhere on the touch screen display, not just where the cursor is located. Conventional portable multifunction devices often require users to precisely contact their fingers on a touch sensitive screen at the location where the cursor is located in order to manipulate the cursor. Such a requirement is cumbersome. The methods described herein allow a user manipulate a cursor and perform editing functions, such as text selection and moving selection, from any part of the touch-sensitive surface  112 , not just where the cursor is located. For example, the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  can be located after a first paragraph but before a second paragraph (e.g.,  FIG. 5J ), on a different word not adjacent to the cursor  522  (e.g.,  FIG. 5L ), on the touch screen keyboard (e.g.,  FIG. 5N ), or on the word that the cursor is located within (e.g.,  FIG. 5P ), among others. These methods reduce the number of steps that a user has to perform to navigate and edit a document, thereby increasing efficiency and ease of use when performing these tasks. 
     The above examples as shown in  FIG. 5J-5P  illustrate cursor manipulation in response to detecting tap when there is no existing selection of content. Referring back to  FIG. 4A , on the other hand, if there is an existing selection of content detected by the device  100 , then the device  100  determines if the touch inputs are located on the selection at  415 . If the device  100  determines that the touch inputs are located on the selection ( 415 —Yes), and determines at  417  that the touch inputs are a tap, then the device  100  expands the selection at  440 . For example, if a word is selected, and a tap  440  is detected, then the sentence containing the previously selected word is selected. In this way a selection can be expanded from a word to a sentence to a paragraph to a page to a document. In some embodiments, instead of expanding the selection, a single two-finger tap on a selected word deselects the word and returns to an initial cursor placement display (e.g., ceasing display of the selection indication  528  and displaying a cursor on the touch screen display). In some embodiments, the placement of the cursor depends on the location of the single two-finger tap. 
     On the other hand, if the device  100  determines at  415  that the touch inputs are not on the selection ( 415 —No) (e.g., outside the selection) and determines at  419  that the touch inputs are a tap, then the device  100  determines whether the selected content is one word at  466 . In accordance with a determination that the selected content is one word ( 466 —Yes), the device  100  expands the selected content to include a sentence containing the word at  467 . On the other hand, in accordance with a determination that the selected content is more than a word, the device  100  displays a cursor at the beginning or end of the selection and dismisses the selection at  468 . In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the tap is not on the selection, the device  100  dismisses the selection and selects the closest word to the contact point of the tap. 
     In other embodiments, after selecting the closest word to the cursor, the device  100  can further detect a two-finger double-tap (e.g., tapping twice with two fingers), a two-finger triple-tap (e.g., tapping three times with two fingers), or a two-finger quadruple-tap (e.g., tapping four times with two fingers). In response to detecting a two-finger double-tap, two-finger triple-tap, or two-finger quadruple-tap, the device  100  expands the selection to a sentence or a line at  460 , to a paragraph at  462 , or to the document at  464 , respectively. In some embodiments, the selection expansion operation is only operable to paragraph level. For example, in response to a two-finger quadruple-tap, the device  100  keeps the paragraph selected without further expanding the selection to the entire document at  464 . In some embodiments, device  100  determines if there is a multi-tap and expands the selection if the duration between each subsequent tap is less than a predetermined threshold (e.g., 0.66 seconds). 
     In some embodiments, if the device  100  determines two substantially simultaneous touch inputs that are located outside an existing selection ( 415 —No) (e.g., on a soft keyboard) and the type of touch inputs is a tap (down), followed by a lift-off (up), followed by another tap (down), and without lift-off, a drag ( 419 —Tap∓half∓drag), the device  100  at step  465  first dismisses the selection, then performs actions similar to those performed at step  471  in  FIG. 4B  described below, such as selecting a word closest to the touch input and expanding the selection while dragging. In some embodiments, similar to the selection expansion behavior described with respect to steps  452  and  434  above, the initial direction of the drag gesture determines the direction of the expansion and the selection expands one word at a time if the drag gesture moves fast, and expands one character at a time if the drag gesture moves slow. 
       FIGS. 5R-5S  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for implementing a tap that is detected outside a selection and selecting the closest word to a contact point of the tap.  FIGS. 5T-5Y  illustrate exemplary user interfaces implementing the steps  460 - 464  ( FIG. 4A ) of expanding the selection in response to a two-finger double-tap, a two-finger triple-tap, and a two-finger quadruple-tap.  FIGS. 5Z-5AD  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for implementing step  440  of expanding the selection in response to tapping on a selection. 
     Turning to  FIG. 5R , which illustrates an exemplary user interface of selecting the closest word to a contact point of a two-finger tap in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, an existing selection  528  (e.g., the word “equal”) is detected by the device  100 , a cursor is not displayed on the touch screen display. In response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  located outside the selection  528  (e.g., on the word “any” in  FIG. 5S ), the device  100  selects a word closest to the contact location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  (e.g., selects the word “any”  528  in  FIG. 5S ). 
       FIGS. 5T-5Y  illustrate the steps  442  and  460 - 464  ( FIG. 4A ) of cursor manipulation in response to two-finger single tap, two-finger double-tap, two-finger triple-tap, and two-finger quadruple-tap, in accordance with an alternative embodiment. When there is no existing selection ( 411 —No) ( FIG. 4A ), in response to detecting a two-finger tap  524  ( FIG. 5T ), and when the cursor  522  is located closest to the word “and,” the device  100  selects ( 442 — FIG. 4A ) the word “and” and displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of “and” to indicate the selection  528 , as shown in  FIG. 5U . 
     In some embodiments, upon determining that there is an existing selection  528  ( 411 —Yes,  FIG. 4A ), e.g., following the two-finger tap as shown in  FIG. 5U , the device  100  detects a two-finger double-tap at a contact point not on the selection ( 415 —No,  419 , and  460  of  FIG. 4A ). In some embodiments, the two-finger double-taps need to be at or near the same contact point on the touch screen display and made within a short predetermined time of one another, e.g., 0.5 seconds. In response to detecting the two-finger double-tap ( 460  of  FIG. 4A ), the device  100  selects a first predetermined expanded portion of the content (e.g., a line or a sentence) that includes at least a portion of the previously selected content  528 . For example, the single line of text (“any nation so conceived and so”) containing the word “and” is selected with a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of the single line of text selection  528 , as shown in  FIG. 5V , or the sentence (“Now we are engaged in a great civil war, testing whether that nation, or any nation so conceived and so dedicated, can long endure”) containing the word “and” is selected with a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of the sentence selection  528 , as shown in  FIG. 5W . 
     In some embodiments, upon determining that there is an existing selection ( 411 —Yes,  FIG. 4A ), e.g., following the two-finger double-tap to select a line or a sentence shown in  FIG. 5V or 5W , the device  100  detects a two-finger triple-tap at a contact point not on the selection ( 415 —No,  419 , and  462  of  FIG. 4A ). In some embodiments, the two-finger triple-taps need to be at or near the same contact point on the touch screen display and made within a short predetermined time of one another, e.g., 0.5 seconds. In response to detecting the two-finger triple-tap ( 462  of  FIG. 4A ), the device  100  selects a second predetermined expanded portion of the content (e.g., a paragraph) that includes at least a portion of the previously selected content  528 , as shown in  FIG. 5X . As further shown in  FIG. 5X , to indicate the paragraph selection  528 , the device  100  displays the second expanded portion of the content as selected content and displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and possibly an end-point object (not shown in  FIG. 5X ) at respective ends of the paragraph selection  528 . 
     In some embodiments, upon determining that there is an existing selection ( 411 —Yes,  FIG. 4A ), e.g., following the two-finger triple-tap to select a paragraph shown in  FIG. 5X , the device  100  detects a two-finger quadruple-tap at a contact point not on the selection ( 415 —No,  419 , and  464  of  FIG. 4A ). In some embodiments, the two-finger quadruple-taps need to be at or near the same contact point on the touch screen display and made within a short predetermined time of one another, e.g., 0.5 seconds. In response to detecting the two-finger quadruple-tap ( 464  of  FIG. 4A ), the device  100  selects a third predetermined expanded portion of the content (e.g., a page or document) that includes at least a portion of the previously selected content  528 , as shown in  FIG. 5Y . 
     It should be noted that expansion of the selection illustrated in  FIGS. 5T-5Y  is performed in response to successive touch inputs.  FIGS. 5T-5Y  illustrate exemplary user interfaces corresponding to the steps  460 - 464  in  FIG. 4A  after the device determines that the touch inputs are located outside a selection or not on or over a selection. In some embodiments, the duration between each successive touch input in a multi-tap input is less than a predetermined amount, such as less than 0.25 seconds. For example, a two-finger quadruple-tap is four two finger taps in rapid succession. In response to a two-finger double-tap, the selection is expanded to a sentence or line; In response to a two-finger triple-tap, the selection is expanded to a paragraph; and in response to a two-finger quadruple-tap, the selection is expanded to the page or document. 
       FIGS. 5Z-5AD  are used to illustrate the step  440  ( FIG. 4A ) of expanding the selection in response to tapping on a selection. After detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at  402  ( FIG. 4A ), and detecting that there is an existing selection ( 411 —Yes) ( FIG. 4A ), and determining that the touch inputs were made on or over a selection ( 415 —Yes), the device determines the type of touch inputs that were detected  417  ( FIG. 4A ). When the device determines that the touch inputs are a tap over an existing selection, then the existing selection is expanded at  440 . This is shown in  FIGS. 5Z-5AD .  FIG. 5Z  shows an existing selection  528  of the word “and” with displayed markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object (not shown) at respective ends of the word to indicate the selection  528 .  FIG. 5Z  also shows the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  detected as a tap for expanding the selection to the next largest size of selection, e.g., word to line, line to sentence, sentence to paragraph, paragraph to page, page to document, or the like. For example, when the selected content is a word (or a plurality of words that are part of a single line or a sentence), the selected content can be expanded to a single line of text (as shown in  FIG. 5AA ) or a sentence (as shown in  FIG. 5AB ) containing the word “and.” 
     In a similar vein, in some embodiments, the device  100  determines that the location of the tap  524  is on a selection  528  of a single line of text ( FIG. 5AA ) or a sentence ( FIG. 5AB ). In response to detecting the tap  440  ( FIG. 4A ), as shown in  FIG. 5AC , the device  100  expands the selection  528  to a paragraph containing the single line of text or the sentence. In some embodiments, to indicate the paragraph selection  528 , the device  100  displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and possibly an end-point object  530  (not shown in  FIG. 5AC ) at respective ends of the paragraph selection  528 . In some embodiments, the device  100  can further determine the location of the tap  524  is on a selection  528  of a paragraph ( FIG. 5AC ). In response, as shown in  FIG. 5AD , the device  100  expands the selection  528  to the electronic document. To indicate the document selection  528 , the device  100  displays markers, such as a start-point object  526  and possibly an end-point object  530  (not shown in  FIG. 5AD ) at respective ends of the document selection  528 . 
     It should be noted that the selection expansion in response to successive touch inputs illustrated in  FIGS. 5T-5Y  is different from the selection expansion illustrated in  FIGS. 5Z-5AD .  FIGS. 5Z-5AD  illustrate exemplary user interfaces corresponding to the step  440  in  FIG. 4A  after the device  100  determines the touch inputs are located on a selection. In contrast,  FIGS. 5T-5Y  illustrate exemplary user interfaces corresponding to the steps  460 - 464  in  FIG. 4A  after the device determines the touch inputs are located outside a selection or not on or over a selection. As stated with respect to  FIGS. 5J-5P  above, the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524  in  FIG. 5T  can be located anywhere on the touch screen display  112 . In response to the first two-finger tap, a word closest to the cursor is selected, as shown in  FIG. 5U . Subsequently each additional two-finger tap on the touch screen display  112  is detected by the device  100 . In some embodiments, the duration of each contact is less than a predetermined threshold such that the additional two substantially simultaneous touch inputs can be detected as a two-finger double-tap, two-finger triple-tap, and two-finger quadruple-tap etc. In response to the double-tap, the selection is expanded to a sentence or line; in response to a triple-tap, the selection is expanded to a paragraph; and in response to a quadruple-tap, the selection is expanded to the page or document. In contrast, the device  100  performs the selection expansion as shown in  FIGS. 5Z-5AD  in response to detecting independent touch inputs on a selection. Thus, the touch inputs illustrates in  FIGS. 5Z-5AD  are detected by the device  100  as separate touch events, not as successive touch events in a single sequence. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4A , in addition to determining the type of touch inputs as drag, flick, and tap, the device  100  can detect the type of touch inputs as hold and drag. If the device  100  does not detect an existing selection ( 411 —No), in response to determining  413  the type of touch inputs as hold and drag, the device  100  initiates selecting a portion of the document and extends the selection commensurate with the dragging gesture at  452 . To determine if the inputs are a hold and drag gesture as compared to simply a drag gesture, the device determines if the touch inputs remain in contact with the screen without moving for a predetermined period of time (e.g., &gt;0.75 seconds or &gt;1 second) before the drag gesture occurs. In some embodiments, the selection starts at the point of contact and expands in the drag direction. 
     If the device  100  detects an existing selection ( 411 —Yes), and further determines that the touch inputs are located on an existing selection ( 415 —Yes), and then determines at  417  that the inputs are a hold and drag, then the device  100  moves the selection at  451 . In some embodiments, the selected text remains in place with only a cursor moving, and only once the user releases contact with the touch screen surface (e.g., a lift-off event) is the selected text moved to the position of the cursor at the time of the lift-off or release. In other embodiments, the selection is dragged around the document and placed at the position of the selection (or a cursor) at the time of contact release or lift off. In yet another embodiment, a ghost copy of the selection is dragged around the document, while the original selection remains in place, and only placed at the position of the selection (or a cursor) at the time of contact release or lift off. 
     If the touch inputs are not located on an existing selection (e.g., outside an existing selection) ( 415 —No), the device  100  determines the type of selection at  419 , and if the type is a hold and drag  453 , expands the existing selection in the direction of the drag gesture at  453 . Here, the expanded selection includes the original selection and any expanded portion of the document.  FIGS. 5AE-5AG  illustrate the step  452  of expanding the selection while dragging.  FIGS. 5AH-5AJ  illustrate exemplary user interfaces implementing the step  451  of moving an existing selection.  FIGS. 5AK-5AL  illustrate exemplary user interfaces implementing the step  453  of starting a selection and extending the selection while dragging. 
       FIGS. 5AE-5AG  illustrate the step  452  ( FIG. 4A ) of expanding the selection while dragging. In  FIG. 5AE , the device  100  determines that prior to detecting the two-finger touch inputs, there is no existing selection. In response to detecting the two-finger touch contacts  524 , followed by a predetermined period of time, followed by a dragging gesture  532  ( FIG. 5AF ), the device  100  determines that the inputs are a hold and drag gesture and starts a selection at the cursor  522  and expands it in a direction of the drag gesture  532 . For example, the cursor is located between the letters “br” and “ought” and the dragging gesture is in the right direction so expansion of the selection is in the right direction to select “ought”  528 . If the dragging continues in a rightward and downward direction, where a release or lift-off event occurs at  531 , the selection (“ought forth on this continent . . . in a great”)  528  is shown in  FIG. 5AG . 
       FIGS. 5AE-5AG  illustrate expanding the selection  528  in accordance with the dragging gesture  532 . In some embodiments, the selection can expand either backward or forward. The initial direction of the drag gesture  532  determines the direction of the expansion. For example, a right (e.g.,  FIG. 5AF ) and/or down drag gesture  532  moves the upside down lollipop shaped end-point object  530  right and/or down without moving the lollipop shaped start-point object  526  in order to expand the selection  528  forward; while a left and/or up drag gesture moves the lollipop shaped start-point object  526  left and/or up without moving the upside down lollipop shaped end-point object  530  in order to expand the selection  528  backward. In some embodiments, the selection  528  expands one word at a time if the drag is fast, and expands one character at a time if the drag is slow. 
       FIGS. 5AH-5AJ  illustrate the step  451  ( FIG. 4A ) of moving an existing selection. Once the device detects two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at  402  ( FIG. 4A ), determines that there is an existing selection ( 411 —Yes) ( FIG. 4A ), and determines that the inputs are on a selection ( 415 —Yes) ( FIG. 4A ), then the device determines the type of input at  417  ( FIG. 4A ). If the type is a hold and drag, as described above, then the selection is moved at  451 . In  FIG. 5AH , the device  100  detects two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first region  524 - 1  on the touch screen display. The first region  524 - 1  is at least partially on or over a location of a selection  528 - 1 , which may be marked by markers, such as a start-point object  526 - 1  and an end-point object  530 - 1  at respective ends of a partial word “ought”. The device  100  further detects the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remaining motionless on the touch screen display for a predetermined duration followed by a continuous drag gesture (e.g., start dragging within 0.5 or 0.75 seconds after remaining motionless) from the location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs in a direction  532  across the touch screen display from the first region  524 - 1  to a second region  524 - 2 . In response to detecting the continuous touch movement, the device  100  moves the selection  528 - 1  across document  500  to a new location  528 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AI  following the continuous movement. 
     As mentioned above, in some embodiments, instead of moving the selection  528 - 1 , a ghost selection  528  is displayed in response to the detection of the two-finger dragging. As shown in  FIG. 5AI , in some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  is displayed offset from the selection  528 - 1 , and in some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  can have a different appearance to the selection  528 - 1 . For example, the ghost selection  528 - 2  can have a different color and/or shade to highlight the ghost selection  528 - 2  from the color and/or shade used to highlight the selection  528 - 1 . Further, the ghost markers  526 - 2  and  530 - 2  mark the beginning and the ending of the ghost selection block  528  can have different color, size, and/or shape from the markers  526 - 1  and  528 - 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  appears at location of the current position of the selection  528 - 1  as soon as the device  100  detects the two-finger dragging, and the start-point object  526 - 1  and the end-point object  530 - 1  can animate to attract the users attention to the appearance of the ghost selection  528 - 2 . While dragging, the ghost selection  528 - 2  moves in the direction of the two-finger movement to indicate the position to where the selection will be moved when the user lifts or releases the contact (e.g., at the lift-off event). The ghost selection  528 - 2  may include a ghost start-point object  526 - 2  and a ghost end-point object  530 - 2 . Both the ghost start point object  526 - 2  and the ghost end-point object  530 - 2  may have different appearances from the start point object  526 - 1  and the end-point object  530 - 1 . On release of the two-finger drag, the selection moves to the location of the ghost selection  528 - 2 . At release of the contacts, the device  100  ceases the display of the ghost selection  528 - 2  along with the ghost markers  526 - 2  and  530 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AJ . In  FIG. 5AJ , the selection  528 - 3  is indicated by markers, such as a start-point object  526 - 3  and an end-point object  530 - 3 . Other suitable mechanisms for displaying the movement of the selection are described above. 
     Turning to  FIG. 5AK ,  FIGS. 5AK-5AL  illustrate exemplary user interfaces implementing step  453  ( FIG. 4A ) of starting a selection and extending the selection while dragging, when the hold and drag are not located on an existing selection (e.g., outside an existing selection in the content region or outside the existing selection on the soft keyboard), in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG. 5AK , after detecting two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524 - 1  ( 402  of  FIG. 4A ), the device  100  determines that there is an existing selection ( 411 —Yes) ( FIG. 4A ). The device  100  further determines at  415  that the touch inputs are not on the selection ( 415 —No) ( FIG. 4A ) (e.g., outside the selection) and determines at  419  that the touch inputs are hold and drag. In response to determining the type of the touch inputs is a hold and drag, the device  100  expands the existing selection in the direction of the drag gesture at  453 . 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 5AK , the device  100  detects the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524 - 1  remaining motionless on the touch screen display for a predetermined duration followed by a continuous drag gesture (e.g., start dragging within 0.5 or 0.75 seconds after remaining motionless) from the location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs in a direction  532  across the touch screen display from the first region  524 - 1  to a second region  524 - 2 . In some embodiments, the drags are detected by the device  100  as a continuous touch movement across the touch screen display from the first location  524 - 1  to the second location  524 - 2 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 5AK , an existing selection  528 - 1  (e.g., the part “ought” of the word “brought”) is detected by the device  100  and a cursor is not displayed on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, while the selection  528  is displayed, the device  100  also display a cursor and the cursor moves in accordance with the drag gesture. In response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs  524 - 1  located outside the selection  528  (e.g., located below the selection “ought” in  FIG. 5AK ), the device  100  expands the original selection  528 - 1  in the direction of the drag gesture  532 . In  FIG. 5AK , the dragging gesture is in the rightward and downward direction towards  524 - 2 . As a result, the expansion of the selection  528 - 1  is in the right and downward direction. When a release or lift-off event occurs at  524 - 2 , the selection (“ought forth on this continent . . . in a great”)  528  is shown in  FIG. 5AL . In  FIG. 5AL , the selection  528  is indicated by markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530 . 
       FIGS. 5AK-5AL  illustrate expanding the selection in accordance with the continuous touch movement  532 . In some embodiments, the selection can expand either backward or forward. The initial direction of the drag gesture  532  determines the direction of the expansion. For example, a right and/or down (as shown in  FIG. 5AK ) drag gesture  532  moves the upside down lollipop shaped end-point object  530  right and/or down without moving the lollipop shaped start-point object  526  in order to expand the selection  528  forward; while a left and/or up dragging gesture moves the lollipop shaped start-point object  526  left and/or up without moving the upside down lollipop shaped end-point object  530  in order to expand the selection  528  backward. In some embodiments, the selection  528  expands one word at a time if the drag is fast, and expands one character at a time if the drag is slow. 
       FIG. 4B  is a flow chart illustrating a method  470  of cursor manipulation with a single touch input (e.g., a single-finger touch input), in accordance with some embodiments. The method  470  is performed at a portable multifunction device (e.g., the device  100  in  FIG. 1A ) with a touch screen display (e.g., the touch screen display  112  in  FIG. 1A ). As described below, the method  470  provides an expedient mechanism for moving the cursor, selecting the content, and providing options to edit the content at a portable multifunction device with a touch screen display. This method is both faster and easier to perform than using a peripheral device, like a mouse. The method is also intuitive to a user, thereby reducing the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from the user when selecting content, and creating a more efficient human-machine interface. A more efficient input mechanism also requires less computing resources, thereby increasing battery life of the device. 
     In some embodiments, the device  100  displays content of an electronic document on the touch screen display  112 . In some embodiments, the content comprises text (e.g., plain text, unstructured text, formatted text, or text in a web page). In other embodiments, the content comprises graphics with or without text. Moreover, the content may be editable or read-only. In addition to displaying the content, when no content is selected, the device  100  may display a cursor within the electronic document. In some embodiments, while displaying the content of the electronic document, the device  100  detects a single-finger touch input (e.g., a single-finger tap) at  472 . The portable multifunction device  100  then determines whether prior to detecting the touch input, there is an existing selection of the content at  474 . 
     If the device  100  detects an existing selection ( 474 —Yes), then the device  100  further determines if the single-finger touch input is located on the selection at  475 . If the device  100  determines that the single-finger touch input is not located on the selection ( 475 —No), then device  100  dismisses the selection at  476  and proceeds to step  480 . On the other hand, if the device  100  determines that the single-finger touch input is located on the selection ( 475 —Yes), the device  100  determines the type of the touch input at  477 . 
     If the device  100  determines the type of single-finger touch input is tap (down), lift (up), tap (down), and a drag ( 477 —Tap∓half∓drag), the device  100  at  487  first dismisses the selection, then performs actions similar to those performed at step  471 , such as selecting a word closest to the touch input and expanding the selection while dragging. If the device  100  determines the type of single-finger touch input is a tap ( 477 —Tap), then the device  100  can perform one of three different options depending on embodiment. 
     In some embodiments, one of the options (Tap Option  3 ,  489 ) is to do-nothing, such that the device  100  does not respond to the single-finger tap in accordance with a determination that the tap is located on a selection (e.g., a selected word). In some embodiment, another option includes dismissing the selection at  485  (Tap Option  1 ) and performing additional actions (e.g., steps  481 - 484  in  FIG. 4B ) in response to the tap gesture as if there were no existing selection. In some embodiments, a third option is to dismiss the selection and place the cursor adjacent to a word within the electronic document based on the location of the single-finger input relative to the closest space to this word at  479  (Tap Option  2 ). With respect to this embodiment, if the single-finger touch input is on a word and the contact location of the single-finger touch input is closer to the beginning of the word, then the device  100  places the cursor before the word, since the closest space to this word is the white space before the word. Conversely, if the single-finger touch input is on a word and the contact location of the single-finger touch input is closer to the end of the word, then the device  100  places the cursor after the word, since the closest space to this word is the white space after the word. 
     For example,  FIGS. 5AM-5AN  illustrate step  479  (Tap Option  2 ,  FIG. 4B ) of dismissing a selection and moving the cursor in response to detecting an existing selection and a single-finger tap on the selection. In  FIG. 5AM , the device  100  detects a single-finger tap at a region  524  on the touch screen display  112 . The region  524  is at a proximate location of the contact point of the single singer tap to the touch screen display  112 , such as located on the word “brought”, closer to the end of the word. As shown in  FIG. 5AM , the region  524  is on the selection  528 , which may be marked by markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of a partial word “ought”. In response to detecting the single-finger tap  524  outside the selection  528 , the device  100  dismisses the selection and moves to the cursor to the closest white space before the word “brought”, as shown in  FIG. 5AN . 
     It should be noted that  FIGS. 5AM-5AN  illustrate dismissing selection in response to tapping on an existing selection of editable text in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, similar actions are performed when tapping on an existing selection of non-editable text (e.g., a web page), such that the existing selection is deselected. 
     Still referring to  FIG. 4B , the above steps are performed when the device  100  detects an existing selection. When there is no existing selection ( 474 —No), the device  100  first determines the type of the single-finger touch input at  480 . In response to recognizing a tap gesture ( 480 —Tap), the device  100  determines a distance to the closest space between two words within the electronic document at  481 . In accordance with a determination that the distance is less than a predetermined threshold distance ( 483 —Yes), the device  100  moves the cursor to the closest space after a preceding word at  482 . In accordance with a determination that the distance is more than a predetermined threshold distance ( 483 —No), the device  100  selects the word closest to the touch input and displays an indication of the selection on the touch screen at  484 . 
     For example,  FIGS. 6A-6B  illustrate step  482  ( FIG. 4B ) of moving cursor in response to a tap gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG. 6A , content of an electronic document is displayed on the touch screen display  112 . The content includes at least one line of text, which further includes at least two words. Based on the distance to the closest white space between two words within the electronic document, the device  100  defines zones (e.g., X zones and Y zone) for each word. In some embodiments, X zones are defined as zones from the beginning or end of a word to a distance less than or equal to a percentage of the word size. In some embodiments, the Y zone is the zone between X-zones for that word, e.g., where the distance to the closest white space is greater than or equal to a percentage of the word size. 
     For example, in  FIG. 6A , the word “Lorem” is the first word in a line of text. The closest white space is the white space between the word “Lorem” and “ipsum”. As shown in  FIG. 6A , X 1  starts from the end of the word “Lorem” to a distance less than or equal to a percentage of the word size (e.g., between the letter “e” and the letter “m” of “Lorem”). Within Y 1 , the distance to the closest white space is greater than or equal to a percentage of the word size “Lorem”. Similarly, X 2 -X 6  start from the beginning/end of a word to a distance less than or equal to a percentage of the word size, and within Y 2 -Y 4 , the distance to the closest white space is greater than or equal to a percentage of the word size. 
     In  FIG. 6A , the device  100  detects a single-finger tap  524  on the touch screen display  112 . The single-finger tap  524  is located approximately on the letter “m” of the word “ipsum” in X 3 . The closest white space to the single-finger tap  524  is the space between the word “ipsum” and the word “dolor”. As a result of detecting the distance from the single-finger tap  524  to the closest white space between words less than a predetermined threshold distance (e.g., the distance from the touch input to the end of the word is less than X 3 ), the device  100  places the cursor in the closest space after a preceding word (e.g., after “ipsum”), as shown in  FIG. 6B . 
     In another example,  FIGS. 5AO-5AP  illustrate step  482  ( FIG. 4B ) of moving the cursor when tapping on white space in between two words. In  FIG. 5AO , the device  100  detects a single-finger tap at a region  524  on the touch screen display  112 . Different from the existing selection scenario as shown in  FIGS. 5AM-5AN , there is no existing selection prior to the single-finger tap at the region  524 . Instead, a cursor  522 - 1  is displayed in the middle of the word “brought.” In  FIG. 5AO , the region  524  indicates the contact point of the single-finger tap to the touch screen display is at a proximate location of the space between two paragraphs. In response to detecting the single-finger tap  524  not located on a word, the device  100  moves the cursor to the contact point  522 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AP , in between two paragraphs right after a preceding word (e.g., right after “equal.”). 
     In yet another example,  FIGS. 5AQ-5AR  illustrate steps  484  ( FIG. 4B ) when a single-finger tap is located on a word. In  FIG. 5AQ , similar to  FIG. 5AO , there is no existing selection prior to the single-finger tap at the region  524 . Instead, a cursor  522  is displayed in the middle of the word “brought.” Different from  FIG. 5AO , in  FIG. 5AQ , the region  524  indicates the contact point of the single-finger tap to the touch screen display is located on a word “conceived”, approximately in the middle (e.g., in a Y zone). As a result of the distance to the closest white space between words (e.g., the white space between the word “nation,” and the word “conceived”) greater than a predetermined threshold distance, the device  100  selects the word “conceived” and displays the selection as shown in  FIG. 5AR . The selection is marked by The word “conceived” shown in the exemplary user interface is long enough for the device  100  to recognize the touch input located in a Y zone. In some embodiments, for short words, e.g., “as”, “do”, “I”, due to the small size of a Y zone for such short words, the device  100  will always place the cursor and not select the word. 
     In  FIG. 5AR , the selection  528  may be marked by markers as an indication of the selection  528 , such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of a partial word “conceived.” In addition, the device  100  displays a command display area  540  adjacent to the selected content  528 . The command display area  540  includes an affordance for cutting the selected content  528  and an affordance for copying the selected content  528  (e.g., “Cut” icon  542  and “Copy” icon  544  in  FIG. 5AR ). In some embodiments, the command display area  540  includes an affordance for pasting previously cut or copied content (e.g., “Paste” icon  546 ). Though not shown in  FIG. 5AR , in some embodiments, the command display area  540  includes an affordance for undoing a previous action, an affordance for displaying additional command options, an affordance redoing a previous action, at least one command that is user configurable, an affordance for defining the word, and/or at least one command that is context sensitive, among others. 
     The above examples ( FIGS. 6A-6B, 5AO-5AP, and 5AQ-5AR ) illustrate various operations performed in response to a single-finger tap on editable content. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the content is editable text, the device  100  displays a cursor in the content displays a soft keyboard for text editing. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4B , if the device  100  determines (at  480 ) the type of single-finger touch input is hold and drag, the device  100  displays a loupe and moves the cursor at  473 .  FIG. 6C  illustrates an exemplary user interface of cursor movement in response to a hold and drag gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     As used herein, a hold and drag gesture is a stationary (or substantially stationary) pressing gesture by a single-finger at a location in the content displayed on the touch screen immediately followed by a drag. For example, a single-finger contact that moves less than a predefined amount (e.g., 1-2 mm) in a predefined time (e.g., 0.2-0.5 seconds) immediately followed by a drag is a hold and drag gesture. In response to recognizing the hold and drag gesture, as shown in  FIG. 6C , the device  100  magnifies a portion of the content proximate to the contact location  524  on the touch screen  112 . The content magnifier  508  displays the magnified portion  543  of the content as well as an insertion marker  545 . The insertion marker  545  is displayed at a location within the expanded portion of the content that corresponds to the contact location of the single-finger. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a movement  532  of the single-finger across the touch screen  112 , the device  100  moves the content magnifier  508 , moves the insertion marker  545 , and changes the magnified portion  543  of the content in accordance with the detected movement of the single-finger. 
     Although not shown in  FIG. 4B , in some embodiments, if the device  100  determines the type of single-finger touch input is hold and drag and the touch input is located on a selection, the device  100  moves the selection. For example,  FIGS. 5AS-5AU  illustrate step  479  ( FIG. 4B ) of moving a selection when the device  100  detects a hold and drag gesture located on a selection. In  FIG. 5AS , the device  100  detects a single-finger touch input at a first region  524 - 1  on the touch screen display  112 . The first region  524 - 1  is at least partially on or over a location of a selection  528 - 1 , which may be marked by markers, such as a start-point object  526 - 1  and an end-point object  530 - 1  at respective ends of a partial word “ought.” The device  100  further detects the single-finger touch input remains motionless on the touch screen display for a predetermined duration followed by a continuous drag gesture (e.g., start dragging within 0.5 or 0.75 seconds after remaining motionless) from the location of the singer-finger touch input in a direction  532  across the touch screen display from the first region  524 - 1  to a second region  524 - 2 . In response to detecting the continuous touch movement, the device  100  moves the selection  528 - 1  across document  500  to a new location  528 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AU  following the continuous movement. 
     As mentioned above, in some embodiments, instead of moving the selection  528 - 1 , a ghost selection  528  is displayed in response to the detection of the single-finger dragging. As shown in  FIG. 5AT , in some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  is displayed offset from the selection  528 - 1 , and in some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  can have a different appearance to the selection  528 - 1 . For example, the ghost selection  528 - 2  can have a different color and/or shade to highlight the ghost selection  528 - 2  from the color and/or shade used to highlight the selection  528 - 1 . Further, the ghost markers  526 - 2  and  530 - 2  mark the beginning and the ending of the ghost selection block  528  can have different color, size, and/or shape from the markers  526 - 1  and  528 - 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  appears at location of the current position of the selection  528 - 1  as soon as the device  100  detects the single-finger dragging, and the start-point object  526 - 1  and the end-point object  530 - 1  can animate to attract the users attention to the appearance of the ghost selection  528 - 2 . While dragging, the ghost selection  528 - 2  moves in the direction of the single-finger movement to indicate the position to where the selection will be moved when the user lifts or releases the contact (e.g., at the lift-off event). The ghost selection  528 - 2  may include a ghost start-point object  526 - 2  and a ghost end-point object  530 - 2 . Both the ghost start point object  526 - 2  and the ghost end-point object  530 - 2  may have different appearances from the start point object  526 - 1  and the end-point object  530 - 1 . On release of the single-finger drag, the selection moves to the location of the ghost selection  528 - 2 . At release of the contacts, the device  100  ceases the display of the ghost selection  528 - 2  along with the ghost markers  526 - 2  and  530 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AU . In  FIG. 5AU , the selection  528 - 3  is indicated by markers, such as a start-point object  526 - 3  and an end-point object  530 - 3 . Other suitable mechanisms for displaying the movement of the selection are described above. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4B , if the device  100  determine (at  480 ) that the single-finger touch input is tap∓half∓drag, the device  100  selects a word closest to the touch input and expands the selection while dragging at  471 . As used herein, a tap∓half∓drag gesture is a gesture that includes an initial touch input followed immediately (e.g., within a predefined time period such as 0.3-0.5 seconds) by an additional touch input on the touch screen display that subsequently moves on the touch screen display without breaking contact with the touch screen display. The move is a continuous touch gesture from a first location of the additional touch input on the touch screen display to a second location on the touch screen display. 
     Still referring to  FIG. 4B , if the device  100  determines (at  480 ) that the single-finger touch input is a drag gesture, the device  100  scrolls the content displayed in the content region of the touch screen display  112  in accordance with the direction of the drag at  488 . For example, an upward drag scrolls the content upward, a downward drag scrolls the content downward, a left drag scrolls the content to the left, and likewise, a right drag scrolls the content to the right. 
     In some embodiments, similar to scrolling in response to a drag gesture, the device  100  scrolls the content displayed in the content region in response to a swipe gesture in accordance with the direction of the swipe. For example, an upward swipe scrolls the content upward, a downward swipe scrolls the content downward, a left swipe scrolls the content to the left, and likewise, a right swipe scrolls the content to the right. 
       FIGS. 6D-6E  illustrate exemplary user interfaces of expanding a selection while dragging in response to a tap∓half∓drag gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures illustrate steps  476  and  471  ( FIG. 4B ). In  FIG. 6D , the device  100  detects a single-finger touch input  524 - 1 . Upon detecting the single-finger touch input  524 - 1 , the device  100  determines that there is an existing selection  528  (e.g., the word “testing”). The selection  528  is marked by markers, such as a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530  at respective ends of the selection  528 . The device  100  further determines that the single-finger touch input is not located on the existing selection  528  (e.g., on the word “nation”), and dismisses the existing selection  528 . The device  100  then determines that the single-finger touch input is a tap-a-half-and-drag gesture. The dragging part of the tap-a-half-and-drag gesture starts from a first location  524 - 1  to a second location  524 - 2  in a direction  532  of the dragging. 
     In response to the tap∓half∓drag gesture, the device  100  selects the word closest to the starting location  524 - 1  (e.g., selecting the word “nation”), then expands the selection to include additional content beyond the selected word in the direction  532  towards the second location  524 - 2 . The end of the selected portion of the content  530  is increased as the finger contact moves forward through text on the touch screen  112 , as illustrated in  FIG. 6E , while the beginning of the selected portion of the content  526  remains fixed (e.g., the beginning of the word “nation”). 
     In some embodiments, the start-point object  526  and the end-point object  530  are displayed moving while the finger is dragging to indicate the expanding selection  528 . The selection  528  expands one word at a time if the finger drags fast, and expands one character at a time if the finger drags slow. Though not shown in  FIGS. 6D-6E , in some embodiments, whenever text is selected, the device  100  displays a command display area adjacent to the selected portion of the content to facilitate editing functions such as cut, copy, paste etc. An exemplary command display area displayed adjacent to a selected portion of the content is shown in  FIG. 5AR  and described in greater detail above with respect to  FIG. 5AR . 
     In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 6E , the device  100  displays a content magnifier  552  adjacent to the respective end of the selected content. The content magnifier  552  displays: an expanded portion  588  of the content proximate to the respective end of the selected content, and a boundary marker  554  that denotes a current position of the respective end of the selected content  528 . In some embodiments, the expanded portion  558  of the content displayed by the content magnifier  552  includes selected content adjacent to the respective end (e.g., “ves tha” in  FIG. 6E ) and unselected content adjacent to the respective end (e.g., “t that” in  FIG. 6E ). 
     Referring back to  FIG. 4B , in some embodiments, if the device  100  determines the type of single-finger touch input is double-tap, triple-tap, quadruple-tap, or 5th-tap ( 480 —double/triple/4th/5th-Tap). In response to recognizing the multi-tap gesture, the device  100  selects a word closest to the touch input in response to a double-tap, and for each successive tap, the device  100  expands the selection with each successive tap at  478 . 
     For example, in  FIG. 6F , in response to detecting a single-finger double-tap touch input, the device  100  selects a word closest to the double-tap touch input (e.g., the word “and”). As shown in  FIG. 6G , the word “and” is selected and an indication of the selection  528  is displayed and enclosed with a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  530 . In case the single-finger touch input is a triple-tap, quadruple-tap, or 5th-tap, in response to detecting the touch input, the device  100  expands the selection, selects a sentence (e.g., the sentence “any nation so conceived and so” in  FIG. 6H ), a paragraph (e.g., the paragraph of “Now we are engaged in a great civil war . . . ” in  FIG. 6I ), or the content of the electronic document ( FIG. 6J ) respectively and the respective selection  528  is displayed with an indication  528  and enclosed with a start-point object  526  and an end-point object  528 . 
     It should be noted that different from in response to a single-tap gesture described above with respect to  FIGS. 6A-6B , in some embodiments, even though the distance between the double-tap and the closest white space is less than a predetermined threshold distance (e.g., in X zone), in response to detecting a double-tap, the device  100  selects the word closest to the double-tap touch input (e.g., the word “and”). Furthermore, different from in response to a single-tap gesture described above with respect to FIGS.  5 AO- 5 AP, in some embodiments, in response to detecting a double-tap located on a white space between two words within the electronic document, the device  100  selects the word following the white space and displays an indication of the selection. Additionally, in some embodiments, when the double-tap is located on the cursor  522 , the device  100  selects the word connected to the cursor and displays an indication of the selection. Exemplary indication of the selection is shown in  FIG. 6G  and described above. 
     In some embodiments, the device  100  can alternatively move the selected content in response to detecting three substantially simultaneous touch inputs, e.g., a three-finger touch input.  FIG. 4C  is a flow chart illustrating a method  490  of content movement with three substantially simultaneous touch inputs (e.g., a three-finger touch input), in accordance with some embodiments. The method  490  is performed at a portable multifunction device (e.g., the device  100  in  FIG. 1A ) with a touch screen display (e.g., the touch screen display  112  in  FIG. 1A ). As described below, the method  490  provides an expedient mechanism for moving the selected content at a portable multifunction device with a touch screen display. 
     Similar to the illustration in  FIGS. 5AS-5AU , in some embodiments, the device  100  first displays content of an electronic document on the touch screen display  112 . In some embodiments, the content comprises text (e.g., plain text, unstructured text, formatted text, or text in a web page). In other embodiments, the content comprises graphics with or without text. Moreover, the content may be editable or read-only. In some embodiments, while displaying the content of the electronic document, the device  100  detects three substantially simultaneous touch inputs (e.g., a three-finger tap) at  492 . The portable multifunction device  100  then determines whether prior to detecting the touch input, there is an existing selection of the content at  494 . If the device  100  detects an existing selection ( 494 —Yes), then the device  100  moves the selection at  496  in response to a hold and drag gesture of the three-finger. 
     It should be noted that the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs can be located anywhere on the touch screen display  112 . For example, a user can touch the touch screen display  112  with three fingers close together or three fingers spread out. Regardless the three touch inputs locations on the touch screen display  112 , the device  100  can detect the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs and perform actions such as moving a selection in response to detecting a drag of the three-fingers following the initial three substantially simultaneous touch inputs. 
     It should also be noted that different from the single-finger hold and drag of a selection as illustrated in  FIGS. 5AS-5AU , in some embodiments, the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs are not necessarily located on the selection. As illustrated in  FIG. 5AV-5AX  and described below, the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs can be located outside a selection, on or over a selection, or even on the keyboard. 
     For example,  FIGS. 5AV-5AX  illustrate step  496  ( FIG. 4C ) of moving a selection in response to the device  100  detecting a hold and drag gesture of the three-finger. In  FIG. 5AV , the device  100  detects a three-finger touch input at a first region  524 - 1  on the touch screen display  112 . The first region  524 - 1  can be located anywhere on the touch screen display  112 . As shown in  FIG. 5AV , the three-finger touch input can be located outside a selection  528 - 1 , which may be marked by markers, such as a start-point object  526 - 1  and an end-point object  530 - 1  at respective ends of a partial word “ought”. Though not shown in  FIG. 5AV , the three-finger touch input can be partially on or over a location of the selection  528 - 1 , or even on the keyboard  521 . 
     In some embodiments, the device  100  further detects the three-finger touch input remains motionless on the touch screen display for a predetermined duration followed by a continuous drag gesture (e.g., start dragging within 0.5 or 0.75 seconds after remaining motionless) from the location of the three-finger touch input in a direction  532  across the touch screen display from the first region  524 - 1  to a second region  524 - 2 . In other embodiments, a delay (e.g., the predetermined duration, is not required for moving the selection. 
     In response to detecting the continuous touch movement, the device  100  moves the selection  528 - 1  across document  500  to a new location  528 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AX  following the continuous movement. 
     As mentioned above, in some embodiments, instead of moving the selection  528 - 1 , a ghost selection  528  is displayed in response to the detection of the single-finger dragging. As shown in  FIG. 5AW , in some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  is displayed offset from the selection  528 - 1 , and in some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  can have a different appearance to the selection  528 - 1 . For example, the ghost selection  528 - 2  can have a different color and/or shade to highlight the ghost selection  528 - 2  from the color and/or shade used to highlight the selection  528 - 1 . Further, the ghost markers  526 - 2  and  530 - 2  mark the beginning and the ending of the ghost selection block  528  can have different color, size, and/or shape from the markers  526 - 1  and  528 - 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the ghost selection  528 - 2  appears at location of the current position of the selection  528 - 1  as soon as the device  100  detects the three-finger dragging, and the start-point object  526 - 1  and the end-point object  530 - 1  can be animated to attract the user&#39;s attention to the appearance of the ghost selection  528 - 2 . While dragging, the ghost selection  528 - 2  moves in the direction of the three-finger movement to indicate the position to where the selection will be moved when the user lifts or releases the contact (e.g., at the lift-off event). The ghost selection  528 - 2  may include a ghost start-point object  526 - 2  and a ghost end-point object  530 - 2 . Both the ghost start point object  526 - 2  and the ghost end-point object  530 - 2  may have different appearances from the start point object  526 - 1  and the end-point object  530 - 1 . On release of the three-finger drag, the selection moves to the location of the ghost selection  528 - 2 . At release of the contacts, the device  100  ceases the display of the ghost selection  528 - 2  along with the ghost markers  526 - 2  and  530 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 5AX . In  FIG. 5AX , the selection  528 - 3  is indicated by markers, such as a start-point object  526 - 3  and an end-point object  530 - 3 . Other suitable mechanisms for displaying the movement of the selection are described above. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 4A-4C  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG. 8  shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  800  configured in accordance with the principles of the invention as described above. The functional blocks of the device may be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the invention. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG. 8  may be combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the invention as described above. Therefore, the description herein may support any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes a display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor within the electronic document; a touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and a processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes a detecting unit  810  and a selecting unit  812 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs anywhere on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs: select a portion of the content in the document closest to the cursor (e.g., with the selecting unit  812 ); and display the portion of the content as selected content (e.g., with the display unit  802 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor at a current location within the content; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810 , a determining unit  816 , and a moving unit  814 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs at a first region on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); upon determining that the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs remain in contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ), detect a continuous touch gesture from a location of the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs across the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ) from the first region to a second region; and in response to detecting the continuous touch gesture: move the cursor from the current location to a new location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture (e.g., with the moving unit  814 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display text and a cursor at a line within the text; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810  and the moving unit  814 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect a two-finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ) in a direction at least partially parallel to the line and towards an edge of the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); and in response to detecting the two-finger swipe gesture: move the cursor to a distal point of the text (e.g., with the moving unit  814 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor within the electronic document; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810  and the selecting unit  812 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect a touch input on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ), wherein the touch input is located on a word within the content; and in response to detecting the touch input: select the word (e.g., with the selecting unit  812 ); and display a command display area adjacent to the selected word, wherein the second command display area includes an icon for cutting the selected word, an icon for copying the selected word, and an icon for pasting a previously selected content. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a selection of the content within the electronic document; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810 , the determining unit  816 , and the moving unit  814 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect a single touch input on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ) at a location over the selection; in response to detecting the single touch input at the location, display a set of options related to the selection (e.g., with the display unit  802 ); determine if the single touch input remains at the location for a predetermined amount of time followed by a continuous touch gesture away from the location on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the determining unit  816 ); and in response to detecting the single touch input remaining at the location for the predetermined amount of time followed by the continuous touch gesture away from the location, move the selection to a different location in a direction of the continuous touch gesture (e.g., with the moving unit  814 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a selection of the content within the electronic document; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810 , the determining unit  816 , and the moving unit  814 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect three substantially simultaneous touch inputs at locations anywhere on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); determine if the three substantially simultaneous touch inputs is followed by three continuous touch gestures away from the locations on the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  (e.g., with the determining unit  816 ); and in response to detecting the three continuous touch gestures, move the selection to a different location in a direction of the continuous touch gestures (e.g., with the moving unit  814 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document, the content includes at least one line of text comprising at least two words; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810 , the determining unit  816 , and the selecting unit  812 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect a touch input on the content (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); and in response to detecting the touch input: determine a distance of the touch input to a closest space between the two words within the electronic document (e.g., with the determining unit  816 ); and in accordance with a determination that the distance is greater than a predetermined threshold distance, select a word within the electronic document closest to the touch input and display the selection (e.g., with the display unit  802 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a soft keyboard in focus; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810  and the changing appearance unit  818 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, blur the soft keyboard (e.g., with the changing appearance unit  818 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  800  includes the display unit  802  configured to display content of an electronic document and a cursor within the electronic document; the touch-sensitive surface unit  804  configured to receive user contacts; and the processing unit  808  coupled to the display unit  802  and the touch-sensitive surface unit  804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  808  includes the detecting unit  810  and the changing appearance unit  818 . 
     The processing unit  808  is configured to: display, on the touch-sensitive surface display unit  802 , a soft keyboard having multiple keys each having a respective alphanumeric character of a plurality of alphanumeric characters; detect two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard (e.g., with the detecting unit  810 ); and in response to detecting the two substantially simultaneous touch inputs on the soft keyboard, change the appearance of the soft keyboard to a changed appearance (e.g., with the changing appearance unit  818 ). 
     Turning to  FIGS. 9A-9AD , these figures illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selecting content, moving a text selection indicator, and changing keyboard appearance based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure), in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10G and 11A-11F .  FIGS. 9B-9AD  include intensity versus time diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to a plurality of intensity thresholds (e.g., “IT D ”, “IT L ”, and “IT 0 ”). 
       FIGS. 9A-9N  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selecting content in a text selection mode in response to a deep press on an onscreen keyboard in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10G . 
     In  FIG. 9A , editable content  900  is displayed in a content presentation region  902  while an application is in a document editing mode. The application runs on a device  100  that has one or more sensors (e.g., contact intensity sensor(s)  259 ,  FIG. 2B ) to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display. In the document editing mode, an onscreen keyboard  921  is displayed for text inputs. A user may enter text by touch inputs (e.g., by contact) on the onscreen keyboard  921  and confirm completion of the editing by performing another touch input (e.g., a tap on “done” button) to exit the editing mode. An insertion marker (e.g., cursor  922 ) is displayed to indicate a current location for text inputs. 
     In  FIG. 9B , at time T 1 , while in the editing mode and displaying the keyboard  921 , the device detects a deep press by a finger contact  924  on the onscreen keyboard  921 , such that the intensity of the press input has increased above the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In response to detecting the deep press, the appearance of the keyboard  921  changes to indicate that the application has entered a text selection mode. In the text selection mode, the keyboard  921  is not responsive to keystrokes, but rather serves as an onscreen touchpad or track pad for moving the cursor. As shown in  FIG. 9B , in some embodiments, the keys are visually obscured. Visually obscuring keys on the keyboard  921  provides an intuitive indication that the function of the keyboard  921  has changed. In some embodiments, the onscreen keyboard  921  shown in  FIG. 9B  is dimmed or blurred relative to the keyboard  921  shown in  FIG. 9A  prior to detecting the deep press, such that the keys are no longer visible or clearly displayed as before. In some embodiments, the keyboard  921  becomes semitransparent, to reveal content lying underneath the keyboard. 
     When the keyboard  921  serves as an onscreen touch pad or track pad, in response to detecting finger movement  932  on the keyboard  921 , in some embodiments, a floating cursor  922 - 1  moves across the touch screen display  112  in accordance with the movement of one or more finger contacts, and a ghost cursor  922 - 2  is displayed offset from the real cursor  922 - 1 . In some embodiments, the ghost cursor  922 - 2  indicates where the cursor will be located after a lift-off of the finger contact  924 . In some embodiments, the ghost cursor  922 - 2  is a modified version of the original cursor  922  displayed on the screen (e.g., the ghost cursor  922 - 2  is in grey color, while the original cursor  922  as shown in  FIG. 9A  is in black color). 
     In some embodiments, when the touch input for entering the text selection mode is detected, the original cursor  922  changes its appearance, while the floating cursor  922 - 1  springs into its initial location from the original text cursor  922 . In some embodiment, the initial location of the floating cursor  922 - 1  is slightly offset from the location of the ghost cursor  922 - 2  (e.g., slightly higher in  FIG. 9B ). In some embodiments, the animation displayed in response to the touch input has the visual effect that the original text cursor  922  has jumped off the page and becomes a floating cursor  922 - 1 , while leaving a shadow or ghost image at its original location. For example, the ghost cursor  922 - 2  shown in  FIG. 9B  is in the middle of the word “Liberty”, the same location as the cursor  922  in  FIG. 9A  when the touch input by finger contact  924  is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode at time T 1 . 
     In some embodiments, when the user subsequently moves the finger contact, the floating cursor  922 - 1  moves with the finger contact  924  in a continuous fluid motion in the content presentation region  902 , while the ghost cursor  922 - 2  moves in discrete jumps from one permitted insertion location to another permitted insertion location to indicate the final location of the cursor if the touch input was terminated at that moment. For example, in  FIG. 9C , when the finger moves along a path  932 , the floating cursor  922 - 1  moves along a similar path, while the ghost cursor  922 - 2  moves in the direction of the finger movement and in discrete jumps from the middle of the word “Liberty” ( FIG. 9B ) to the end of the word “conceived” ( FIG. 9C ), then to the middle of the word “created” ( FIG. 9D ). The ghost cursor  922 - 2  indicates the position where a cursor will be displayed when the user lifts the finger. As shown in  FIGS. 9C and 9D , after the initial deep press at time T 1 , the intensity of the contact  924  on the touch screen  112  can be above or below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  during the finger movement between time T 1  and T 3 . 
     In  FIG. 9E , at the end of the finger movement  932 , the contact intensity decreases to zero at time T 4 , which corresponds to a lift-off of the finger. In response to the lift-off, in some embodiments, the device ceases to display the floating cursor, maintains display of the ghost cursor at a respective permitted insertion position reached by the ghost cursor after the discrete movements of the ghost cursor (e.g., in the middle of the word “created”). As shown in  FIG. 9E , in some embodiments, the device ceases to display the ghost cursor, displays the cursor  922  in the middle of the word “created”, and restores the appearance of the onscreen keyboard  921  (e.g., no longer obscured) to indicate the end of the text selection mode and that the onscreen keyboard  921  is responsive to keystrokes. 
     In  FIG. 9F , while in the text selection mode, at time T 4 , when a ghost cursor (not shown in  FIG. 9F ) is located in the middle of the word “created”, the device detects the intensity of the press input exceed the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In response to detecting the deep press on the editable content  900 , the device begins to select a portion of the text input  928  in accordance with the movement  932  of the contact in the touch input. After time T 4 , during the movement  932 , the intensity of the press input can be above or below the deep press intensity threshold IT D . 
       FIGS. 9G-9L  illustrate a variety of possible behaviors that can occur at time T 5  in accordance with some embodiments. 
     In  FIG. 9G , at time T 5 , the device detects lift-off of the contact in the touch input, such that the intensity of the press input is zero. In response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, in some embodiments, the device confirms selection of the portion of the text input  928 . In some embodiments, a selection box  928  (e.g., a grey box) is maintained on the selected portion of the text input, and/or a menu bar  940  is displayed that shows actions that can be performed on the selected portion of the text input (e.g., copying  944 , defining, cutting  942 , pasting, etc.). Thus,  FIGS. 9F and 9G  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 924 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, and then lift-off of the contact to confirm the selection. 
     In  FIG. 9H , after selecting the portion of the text input between time T 4  and T 5 , while the portion of the text input is selected ( FIG. 9F ), the device detects an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the deep press intensity threshold IT D  at time T 5 . In response to detecting the deep press while the portion of the text input is selected, in some embodiments, the device clears selection of the portion of the text input and displays the insertion marker  922 , as shown in  FIG. 9H . Thus,  FIGS. 9F and 9H  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 924 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, and then a second deep press input by the contact to clear the selection. 
     In  FIG. 9I , instead of clearing the selection as shown in  FIG. 9H , upon detecting the deep press at time T 5 , while the portion of the text input is selected ( FIG. 9F ), the device detects an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the deep press intensity threshold IT D  followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact. In response to detecting the stationary deep press followed by the lift-off, the device confirms the selection  928 , and in some embodiments, displays a menu bar  940 . Thus,  FIGS. 9F and 9I  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 924 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, and then a second deep press input by the contact and lift-off without further movement of the contact to confirm the selection. 
     In  FIG. 9J , upon detecting the deep press at time T 5 , while the portion of the text input is selected ( FIG. 9F ), the device detects an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the deep press intensity threshold IT D  followed by further movement  932  of the contact. In response to the movement following the deep press, the device clears the selection and displays the insertion marker  922  at the end of the word “created”. After clearing the selection at time T 5 , a new selection  928  is made in accordance with the finger movement  932  between time T 5  and T 6 , as shown in  FIG. 9K . The new selection  928  starts from the end of the word “created”, where the insertion marker  922  was located when a deep press was detected at time T 5 . Thus,  FIGS. 9F, 9J, and 9K  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 924 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, then a second deep press input by the contact to confirm the selection, and then further movement of the contact to clear the prior selection and start a new selection. 
     In  FIG. 9L , upon detecting the deep press at time T 5 , while the portion of the text input is selected ( FIG. 9F ), the device detects an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the deep press intensity threshold IT D  followed by further movement  932  of the contact. In response to the movement following the deep press, the device moves the floating cursor  922 - 1  and the ghost cursor  922 - 2  within the content presentation region  902  in accordance with the further movement  932  of the contact. Thus,  FIGS. 9F and 9L  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 924 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, then a second deep press input by the contact to confirm the selection, and then further movement of the contact to clear the prior selection and move the cursor(s), without starting a new selection. 
     In  FIG. 9M , while in the text selection mode after detecting a deep press at time T 1 , the device detects a first local intensity peak of the touch input at time T 4  followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input at time T 5  that both exceed the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In response, the device selects a predetermined unit (e.g., a word, or a phrase, or a sentence) of the text input according to a current location of the ghost cursor. For example, at time T 3 , the ghost cursor  922 - 2  is located in the middle of the word “created” ( FIG. 9D ). In response to detecting two local intensity peak exceeding the deep press intensity threshold IT D  at time T 4  and T 5  respectively, the device selects the word “created” according to the current location of the ghost cursor located in the middle of the word. 
     In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 9M , the device detects an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above the predefined threshold (e.g., IT D ) followed by a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D , and, optionally, a hysteresis intensity threshold that is below the predefined intensity threshold), which in turn is followed by another increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). 
     In some embodiments, the criteria for selecting the first predetermined unit of the text includes a criterion that is met when the second increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) occurs within a predetermined time period after the first increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D , the double press is a quick double press to trigger selection of the first predetermined unit of text input). For example, when the duration between time T 4  and T 5  is less than a threshold, the criteria for selecting the first predetermined unit of text are met. 
     In some embodiments, instead of just two increases in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), three such increases are detected and used to trigger selection of a second predetermined unit of text input (e.g., a quick triple press triggers selection of a sentence, whereas a quick double press triggers selection of a word). 
     In  FIG. 9N , after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, the device detects a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). In some embodiments, the three consecutive local intensity peaks at time T 4 , T 5 , and T 6  are spaced within a predetermined duration (e.g., within 100 ms or within 200 ms) such that the three intensity peaks are recognized as a single user command (e.g., a triple deep press). In response to detecting the triple deep press, the device selects a second predetermined unit (e.g., a sentence “Four score . . . equal.”) of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit (e.g., the word “created” in  FIG. 9M ) of the text input. 
     Turning to  FIGS. 9O-9AD ,  FIGS. 9O-9AD  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selecting content. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below with respect to  FIGS. 11A-11F . 
     In  FIG. 9O , editable content  900  is displayed while an application is in a document editing mode. The application runs on a device  100  that has one or more sensors (e.g., contact intensity sensor(s)  259 ,  FIG. 2B ) to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display. A user may edit text (e.g., via a keyboard, not shown) and confirm completion of the editing by performing a touch input (e.g., a tap on “done” button) to exit the editing mode. An insertion marker (e.g., cursor  922 ) is displayed to indicate a current location for text inputs. 
     At a time prior to T 0 , no contact is present or detected on touch screen display  112 . At T 0 , the device detects the intensity of the press input increases above the contact intensity threshold IT 0 . In response to detecting the finger contact  925  on the editable content  900 , the device moves a text selection indicator (e.g., a cursor  922 ) to the location that corresponds to the finger contact (e.g., between the character “r” and “o” of the word “from). 
     In  FIG. 9P , in some embodiments, after the intensity of the press input increases above the contact intensity threshold IT 0  at T 0 , the finger press maintains its pressure, which corresponds to a press and hold gesture. In response to detecting the press and hold gesture, the device displays a magnifying loupe  908 . In the magnifying loupe  908 , the device expands a portion  943  of the editable content on the touch screen display to a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification. The content magnifier  908  displays the expanded portion  943  of the editable content and a position marker  945  (which corresponds to cursor  922 , and which may be displayed in addition to cursor  922  or in place of cursor  922 ) at a first location within the expanded portion of the editable content (e.g., in the middle of the word “from”). In some embodiments, the expanded portion  943  of the editable content displayed in the content magnifier includes portions of at least three horizontal lines of text displayed concurrently. In some embodiments, the content magnifier  908  has a predefined shape (e.g., a circle). 
     In  FIG. 9Q , in some embodiments, after the intensity of the press input increases above the contact intensity threshold IT 0  at T 0 , the intensity of the finger press further increases. At time T 1 , the device detects that the intensity of the press input has increased above the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In some embodiments, in response to detecting the deep press on the editable content  900 , the device displays the content magnifier  908 . 
     In  FIG. 9P  or  FIG. 9Q , when the device detects movement  932  of the finger contact  925  across the touch screen display, the device moves the content magnifier  908  and the insertion marker  922  (and/or position marker  945 ) in accordance with the movement of the finger contact  925 . In  FIG. 9R , in response to detecting the movement  932  of the finger gesture from the middle of the word “from” at T 1  to the middle of the word “nation” at T 2 , the device moves the content magnifier  908  and the insertion marker  922  in accordance with the movement of the finger. During the finger movement  932 , the intensity of the press input can increase or decrease. For example, as shown in  FIG. 9R , after time T 1 , the intensity continues to rise above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  then decreases to dip below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  at time T 2 . The device continues to move the content magnifier  908  and the insertion marker  922  until the device detects the intensity of the press input has once again increased above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  at time T 3 , as shown in  FIG. 9S . 
     In  FIG. 9S , at time T 3 , the device detects a deep press followed by movement of contact  925 . In response to detecting the deep press followed by movement of contact  925 , the device selects editable text (e.g., one character at a time) as the finger contact  925  moves. In some embodiments, the selected content  928  is marked by a start-point object  926  and an end-point object  930  at respective ends of the selected content  928 . For example, in response to detecting the movement  932  of the finger contact  925  from the middle of the word “nation” to the middle of the word “under”, the device selects the editable content as the finger moves and marks the selection  928  by the start-point object  926  in the middle of the word “nation” and the end-point object  930  in the middle of the word “under”. 
     In the corresponding intensity diagram, the movement of the finger from the middle of the word “nation” to the middle of the word “under” corresponds to the segment between time T 3  and T 4 . As shown in  FIG. 9S , once the initial deep press is detected, the intensity of the press input does not need to be constantly above the deep press intensity threshold IT D . Even when the intensity of the press input has fallen below IT D  during part of the finger movement, the content selection continues. 
       FIGS. 9T-9X  illustrate a variety of possible behaviors that can occur at time T 5  in accordance with some embodiments. 
     In  FIG. 9T , at the end of the content selection, in some embodiments, the device detects lift-off of the finger contact at time T 5  such that the device detects the intensity of the finger contact  925  decreases to zero. In response to detecting the lift-off, the device maintains the selection  928  and displays an action menu  940  adjacent to the selected content  928 . In some embodiments, the action menu  940  includes an icon  942  for cutting the selected content  928 , an icon  944  for copying the selected content  928 , and an icon  946  for looking up the selected content  928 . Thus,  FIGS. 9S and 9T  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 925 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, and then lift-off of the contact to confirm the selection. 
     In  FIG. 9U , at the end of the content selection, in some embodiments, the device detects another deep press by finger contact  925  at time T 5 . In response to detecting the deep press, the device cancels the selection, and places the text selection indicator (e.g., cursor  922 ) at the deep press location (e.g., in the middle of the word “under”), and starts a new selection upon detecting further finger movement. Thus,  FIGS. 9S and 9U  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 925 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, and then a second deep press input by the contact to clear the selection. 
     In  FIG. 9V , in some embodiments, instead of canceling the selection upon detecting another deep press by finger contact  925 , at time T 5 , in response to detecting the deep press, the device maintains the selection  928 . Subsequently, in some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 9W , the device detects finger movement  932  between time T 5  and T 6 . In response to detecting the finger movement  932 , the selection is cleared, and the text selection indicator (e.g., cursor  922 ) moves from the middle of the word “under” to the middle of the word “of” in accordance with the movement of the finger  932 . Thus,  FIGS. 9S, 9V, and 9W  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 925 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, then a second deep press input by the contact to confirm the selection, and then further movement of the contact to clear the prior selection and move the cursor(s), without starting a new selection. 
       FIG. 9X  illustrates, in some embodiments, both cursor positioning and text selection occur in the text selection mode. After detecting the deep press at time T 5 , in response to detecting further finger movement  932  between time T 5  and T 6 , the device maintains the selection  928  and displays an action menu  940  adjacent to the selected content  928 . In addition, the device displays the text selection indicator (e.g., cursor  922 ) that moves in accordance with movement  932  of the finger. The device will clear the selection  928  upon detecting another deep press. Thus,  FIGS. 9S and 9X  illustrate using a first deep press input by a contact ( 925 ) to initiate text selection, then movement of the contact to select text, then a second deep press input by the contact to confirm and complete the selection, and then further movement of the contact to move the cursor(s) and maintain the action menu  940 , without clearing the selected content. 
     In some embodiments, if a third deep press input by the contact  925  is detected after the further movement of the contact to move the cursor(s), then the selected content (e.g., “ation un” in  FIG. 9X ) is cleared and display of the action menu  940  ends. In some embodiments, the third deep press input by the contact initiates text selection such that movement of the contact  925  after the third deep press input selects text in accordance with the movement of the contact  925 . 
     In some embodiments, the third deep press input does not clear the previously selected content, but the third deep press input by the contact does initiate additional text selection such that movement of the contact  925  after the third deep press input selects an additional portion of text in accordance with the movement. In these embodiments, a user is able to select multiple portions of content with a single continuous contact by repeatedly: deep pressing to initiate text selection, moving to select text, deep pressing again to complete text selection, and moving without selecting text to a next position on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a desired starting location for the next text selection. 
     On the other hand, if lift off of contact  925  is detected without detecting a third deep press input by contact  925 , then display of the selected content “ation un” and the action menu  940  are maintained. 
     In some embodiments, in  FIG. 9X , the selected text “ation un” is copied by moving contact  925  across the touch-sensitive surface to a position that corresponds to the location of copy icon  944 , and then detecting a deep press with contact  925  at that position. Similarly, in  FIG. 9X , the selected text “ation un” is cut by moving contact  925  across the touch-sensitive surface to a position that corresponds to the location of cut icon  942 , and then detecting a deep press with contact  925  at that position. Similarly, in  FIG. 9X , the selected text “ation un” is looked up by moving contact  925  across the touch-sensitive surface to a position that corresponds to the location of lookup icon  946 , and then detecting a deep press with contact  925  at that position. Alternatively, while action menu  940  is displayed, a tap gesture on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the location of one of icons  942 ,  944 , and  946  in the action menu  940  initiates the corresponding action. In some embodiments, a deep press input (e.g., an increase in intensity from below IT D  to above IT D ) by contact  925  on text (e.g., a word, set of words or characters, hyperlink, or other portion of text) while the text is selected initiates a predefined user interface action associated with the selected text. In some embodiments, the predefined user interface action includes displaying additional information about the selected text (e.g., displaying a region displayed overlaid on the user interface that includes the text, wherein the overlaid region includes additional information about the text such as a definition for a word, an encyclopedia entry for a word or phrase, or a preview of a linked resource such as a webpage for a hyperlink). In some embodiments, the additional information continues to be displayed overlaid on the user interface that includes the text until contact  925  ceases to be detected, and the device ceases to display the additional information in response to ceasing to detect contact  925 . In some embodiments, the additional information for the selected text continues to be displayed overlaid on the user interface that includes the text until another deep press (e.g., an increase in intensity from below IT D  to above IT D ) by contact  925  is detected on the selected text, and the device ceases to display the additional information in response to detecting a deep press (e.g., an increase in intensity from below IT D  to above IT D ) by contact  925  on the selected text while the additional information for the selected text is displayed. 
     Turning to  FIGS. 9Y-9AD ,  FIGS. 9Y-9AD  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selecting read-only content (e.g., a webpage) on a device  100  that has one or more sensors (e.g., contact intensity sensor(s)  259 ,  FIG. 2B ) to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display. In  FIG. 9Y , prior to time T 0 , no contact is present or detected on the touch screen  112 . At T 0 , the device detects the intensity of a press input by finger contact  927  increases above the contact intensity threshold IT 0 . 
     In  FIG. 9Z , at time T 1 , the device detects that the intensity of the press input by finger contact  927  has increased above the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In response to detecting the deep press on the read-only content, the device displays a selection box  929  around a word (e.g., “Translation”) in the read-only text. 
     In  FIG. 9AA , at time T 2 , the device detects a movement  932  of the finger contact  927  from the word “Translation” to “Gift” in the read-only content. In accordance with the movement of the finger contact  927 , additional words are selected, and the selection box  929  expands to “Translation: A U.S. Gift”. In some embodiments, the expansion increases one word at a time. 
     In  FIG. 9AB , at time T 3 , the device detects that the intensity of the press input by finger contact  927  has increased above the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In response to detecting the deep press, the device clears the selection, and starts a new selection by selecting a word at the deep press location of finger contact  927  (e.g., the word “Gift”) as shown in  FIG. 9AB  and increases the new selection box  929  one word at a time in accordance with the movement  932  of the finger contact  927 , as shown in  FIG. 9AC . 
     In  FIG. 9AD , at the end of the content selection, in some embodiments, the device detects a lift-off of the finger contact  927 , such that the intensity of the press input has decreased to zero. In response to detecting the lift-off, the device maintains the selection and displays an action menu  940  adjacent to the selected content in selection box  929 . The action menu  940 , in some embodiments, includes an icon for copying the selected content. 
       FIGS. 10A-10G  illustrate a flow diagram of a method  1000  of manipulating a cursor in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1000  is performed at ( 1002 ) an electronic device (e.g., portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with one or more processors, memory, and a display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1000  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  1000  provides an efficient way to manipulate a cursor. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when using a cursor, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to manipulate a cursor faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device concurrently displays ( 1004 ) an onscreen keyboard (e.g., keyboard  921 ,  FIG. 9A ) and a content presentation region  902  on the touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the content presentation region displays ( 1006 ) text input received from the onscreen keyboard. The device then detects ( 1008 ) a touch input (e.g., by finger contact  924 ) on the onscreen keyboard  921  displayed on the touch-sensitive display. In response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, the device determines ( 1010 ) whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode. 
     In some embodiments, the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include ( 1012 ) the touch input including a two-finger drag gesture over the onscreen keyboard ( FIG. 7B ). In some embodiments, a two-finger drag gesture that starts outside of the onscreen keyboard and enters the onscreen keyboard through movement of the finger contacts satisfies the criteria for entering the text selection mode ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ). In some embodiments, after entering the onscreen keyboard, as long as the two-finger gesture is confined within the onscreen keyboard, the criteria for entering the text selection mode are satisfied. 
     In accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, the device concurrently displays ( 1014 ), in the content presentation region  902 , a first cursor (e.g., ghost cursor  922 - 2 ,  FIG. 9B ) at a first location and a second cursor (e.g., floating cursor  922 - 1 ,  FIG. 9B ) at a second location that is different from the first location. In some embodiments, the second cursor  922 - 1  is a cursor that moves across the touch-sensitive display in accordance with the movement of one or more finger contacts in the touch input ( FIGS. 9C-9E ). In some embodiments, the first cursor  922 - 2  is a ghost cursor that indicates where the cursor will be located after the lift-off of the finger contact ( FIGS. 9C-9E ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device has ( 1016 ) one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes an input by a contact on the onscreen keyboard, and the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the contact on the onscreen keyboard having an intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold ( FIG. 9B ). In some embodiments, determining whether the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode includes determining whether the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes a press input by finger contact  924  over the onscreen keyboard  921 , and the press input by finger contact  924  has a contact intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold IT D  ( FIG. 9B ). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, the device visually obscures ( 1018 ) keys on the onscreen keyboard ( FIG. 9B ). In some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes ( 1020 ) applying a blurring effect to the onscreen keyboard ( FIG. 9B ). As shown in  FIG. 9B , by applying a blurring effect to the keyboard, the keys on the keyboard become fuzzy and indiscernible. In some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes ( 1022 ) transforming the onscreen keyboard into an onscreen touchpad ( FIGS. 9B-9D ). In some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes ( 1024 ) making the onscreen keyboard semitransparent to partially reveal content lying underneath the onscreen keyboard ( FIGS. 9B-9D ). 
     In some embodiments, the second location  922 - 1  ( FIG. 9B ) is ( 1026 ) based on a location of an initial contact in the touch input, and the first location is a permitted insertion position in the content presentation region that is based on the second location. In some embodiments, the initial location of a finger contact  924  on the touch screen display  112  determines the initial position of the second cursor. For example, if the initial location of the finger contact is on the left portion of the touch screen display  112 , the second cursor  922 - 1  will be displayed at a corresponding location on the left portion of the content presentation region ( FIG. 9L ). Conversely, as shown in  FIG. 9B , when the initial location of the finger contact  924  is on the right portion of the touch screen display  112 , the second cursor  922 - 1  will be displayed at a corresponding location on the right portion of the content presentation region  902  ( FIG. 9B ). 
     In some embodiments, once the initial position of the second cursor (e.g., floating cursor  922 - 1 ,  FIG. 9B ) is determined based on the initial position of the finger contact, the initial position of the first cursor (e.g., ghost cursor  922 - 2 ,  FIG. 9B ) is determined based on the initial position of the second cursor. In some embodiments, the original text cursor (e.g., cursor  922 ,  FIG. 9A ) jumps to the position of the second cursor (e.g., floating cursor  922 - 1 ,  FIG. 9B ) to serve as the second cursor, and the first cursor (e.g., ghost cursor  922 - 2 ,  FIG. 9B ) is created at the corresponding insertion position (e.g., the position in the middle of the word “Liberty” marked by the insertion marker  922  in  FIG. 9A ) that is associated with the second cursor. 
     In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 9B , the first location is ( 1028 ) an insertion position at which the first cursor  922 - 2  is located when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and the second location is displaced from the first location by a predetermined offset. For example, the insertion marker  922  is displayed in the text input (e.g., in the middle of the word “Liberty,  FIG. 9A ) when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode ( FIG. 9B ). When it is determined that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, the first cursor (e.g., ghost cursor  922 - 2 ) is displayed at the position of the insertion marker (e.g., in the middle of the word “Liberty,  FIG. 9B ), and a second cursor (e.g., floating cursor  922 - 1 ) is created and placed near the first cursor. When the user subsequently moves the finger contact in the touch input, the floating cursor is dragged by the finger contact, and the first cursor moves from permitted insertion location to permitted insertion location in accordance with the current position of the floating cursor. In some embodiments, when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, an animation is displayed that shows the floating cursor  922 - 1  being peeled off the first cursor  922 - 2 , and floating above the first cursor  922 - 2  at a predetermined distance, and the first cursor  922 - 1  takes on an appearance (e.g., grayed) that mimics a shadow or ghost of the floating cursor  922 - 1 . 
     In some embodiments, one of the first and second cursors is ( 1030 ) already displayed in the content presentation region  902  before both of the first and second cursors are concurrently displayed in the content presentation region  902 . In some embodiments, the floating cursor  922 - 1  is already displayed when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode. In some embodiments, the insertion cursor  922 - 2  is already displayed when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode. 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1032 ) movement of one or more contacts of the touch input, and moves ( 1034 ) the second cursor (e.g., the floating cursor  922 - 1 ) within the content presentation region in accordance with the movement of the one or more contacts of the touch input (e.g., the movement of the floating cursor smoothly follows the movement of a finger contact in terms of speed and direction). In some embodiments, the device moves ( 1036 ) the first cursor based on the movement of the second cursor, and movement of the first cursor includes discrete movements between permitted insertion positions in the content presentation region. For example, when the user moves the finger contact in the touch input ( FIGS. 9B-9D ), the floating cursor  922 - 1  is dragged by the finger contact, and the first cursor (e.g., ghost cursor  922 - 2 ) moves from permitted insertion location to permitted insertion location in accordance with the current position of the floating cursor  922 - 1  (e.g., from the middle of the word “Liberty in  FIG. 9B  to the end of the word “conceived” in  FIG. 9C ”, then to the middle of the word “created” in  FIG. 9D ). 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1038 ) a lift-off of the touch input after detecting the movement of the one or more contacts of the touch input ( FIG. 9E ). In response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, the device ceases ( 1040 ) to display the second cursor. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, the device maintains ( 1042 ) display of the first cursor at a respective permitted insertion position reached by the first cursor after the discrete movements of the first cursor (e.g., the middle of the word “created” in  FIG. 9D ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, the device ceases ( 1044 ) to display the first cursor ( FIG. 9E ). 
     In some embodiments, the onscreen keyboard is obscured in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, the device restores ( 1046 ) display of the onscreen keyboard ( FIG. 9E ). 
     In some embodiments, the device has ( 1048 ) one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and using the one or more sensors, the device detects that an intensity of a contact in the touch input exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). After detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, the device detects ( 1050 ) movement of the contact in the touch input. In response to detecting the movement of the contact in the touch input, after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, the device selects ( 1052 ) a portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input (e.g., selecting “eated” in accordance with the finger movement  932 ,  FIG. 9F ). In some embodiments, the selected portion of the text input begins ( 1054 ) at a position of the first cursor (e.g., between the character “r” and “e” of the word “created”,  FIG. 9F ), when the detected intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeded the predetermined intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1056 ) lift-off of the contact in the touch input after selecting the portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input. In response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, the device confirms ( 1058 ) selection of the portion of the text input ( FIG. 9G ). 
     In some embodiments, after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, the device detects ( 1060 ) an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold (e.g., IT D ). In response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold while the portion of the text input is selected, the device clears ( 1062 ) selection of the portion of the text input ( FIG. 9H ). 
     In some embodiments, after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, the device detects ( 1064 ) an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact. In response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact, the device confirms ( 1066 ) selection of the portion of the text input ( FIG. 9I ). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact: selection of text is stopped, a selection box is maintained on the selected portion of the text input, and/or a menu bar is displayed that shows actions that can be performed on the selected portion of the text input (e.g., copying, defining, cutting, pasting, etc.). 
     In some embodiments, after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, the device detects ( 1068 ) an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by further movement of the contact. In response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact, the device clears ( 1070 ) selection of the portion of the text input ( FIG. 9J ). Further, in some embodiments, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact, the device starts ( 1072 ) selection of a new portion of the text input in accordance with the further movement of the contact ( FIG. 9K ). In some other embodiments, instead of starting a new selection, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact, the device moves ( 1074 ) the second cursor and the first cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the further movement of the contact ( FIG. 9L ). 
     In some embodiments, the device has one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and using the one or more sensors, in the text selection mode, the device detects ( 1076 ) a first local intensity peak in the touch input followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input that both exceed a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). In response to detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak that both exceed the predetermined intensity threshold, the device selects ( 1078 ) a first predetermined unit (e.g., a word as shown in  FIG. 9M , or a phrase, or a sentence as shown in  FIG. 9N ) of the text input according to a current location of the first cursor. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, the device detects ( 1080 ) a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a triple deep press). In response to detecting the three consecutive local intensity peaks in the touch input that all exceed the predetermined deep press intensity threshold, the device selects ( 1082 ) a second predetermined unit (e.g., a sentence,  FIG. 9N ) of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit (e.g., a word,  FIG. 9M ) of the text input. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 10A-10G  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  400  and  1100 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1000  described above with respect to  FIGS. 10A-10G . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1000  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  400  and  1100 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
       FIGS. 11A-11F  illustrate a flow diagram of a method  1100  of selecting content in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1100  is performed at ( 1102 ) an electronic device (e.g., portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with one or more processors, memory, a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1100  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  1100  provides an efficient way to select content with press and movement inputs by a single continuous contact on the touch-sensitive surface, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to select content faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     While a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) is detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the device concurrently displays ( 1104 ) on the display content (e.g., editable content in  FIGS. 9A-9X  and/or read-only content in  FIGS. 9Y-9AD ) and a text selection indicator at a first location within the content. 
     In some embodiments, the text selection indicator is a cursor (e.g., cursor  922 ) that moves within editable content ( FIGS. 9O-9R ). In some embodiments, the text selection indicator is a selection box or other area that encloses selected content for read-only content (e.g., selection box  929 ,  FIG. 9Z-9AD ). In some embodiments, the text selection indicator indicates the starting location of content selection when no content is currently selected ( FIG. 9P ), and indicates the end location of the currently selected content as a result of contact movement in a content selection mode. In some embodiments, the selection box has a starting edge that indicates the starting location of the selected content, and an end edge that indicates the end location of the selected content (e.g.,  FIGS. 9S and 9Z ). In some embodiments, the cursor moves one character at a time ( FIGS. 9P-9R ). In some embodiments, the selection box expands or contracts one word at a time (e.g., selection of read-only content by selection box  929 ,  FIGS. 9Z-9AA ). In some embodiments, the selection box selects at least one word at any given time (e.g., selection of read-only content,  FIG. 9Z ). In some embodiments, a magnifying loupe (e.g.,  908  in  FIG. 9P ) is displayed with the cursor and shows a magnified version of the cursor and surrounding content. In some embodiments, a magnifying loupe is displayed with the selection box and shows a magnified version of the selection box and surrounding content (e.g.,  952  in  FIG. 9S ). 
     The device detects ( 1106 ) a first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to movement of at least a portion of the text selection indicator from the first location to a second location on the display (e.g., moving a cursor to the second location on the display or moving an edge of a selection box to the second location on the display, where the edge of the selection box corresponds to one end of the selected content). In some embodiments, the device detects the first press input and the subsequent movement by detecting an increase in intensity of the contact above a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press intensity threshold IT D ), followed by detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity that remains above a predetermined minimum intensity value (e.g., a light press intensity threshold or a contact detection threshold). For example, as shown in  FIG. 9AA , after applying a deep press using contact  927  at time T 1 , the user may ease the contact intensity on the touch-sensitive surface during movement of the contact, as long as a the contact intensity is maintained above a predetermined minimum value, such as the light press threshold intensity IT L , or the contact detection threshold IT 0 . 
     In response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface, the device selects ( 1110 ) content between the first location and the second location (e.g., selecting content for an editing operation, such as copying). In some embodiments, the selected content (e.g., editable text or read-only text) is enclosed by a highlighted area (e.g., area  928  in  FIG. 9S  or area  929  in  FIG. 9AA ) that starts at the first location (e.g.,  926  in  FIG. 9S ) and ends at the second location (e.g.,  930  in  FIG. 9S ). In some embodiments, the selected content is enclosed by the selection box that encloses a word at the first location and a word at the second location and every word in between ( FIG. 9AA ). In some embodiments, the first location corresponds to the location of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at the time that a first press input is received (e.g., in the middle of the word “nation” at time T 3  in  FIG. 9S ), and the second location corresponds to the location of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface when a second press input is received (e.g., in the middle of the word “under” at time T 5  in  FIG. 9V ). 
     While the content between the first location and the second location is selected (e.g., after moving at least the portion of the text selection indicator to the second location), the device detects ( 1112 ) a second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, as shown in  FIG. 9V , the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact above an intensity threshold, such as a deep press threshold IT D  at time T 5 . 
     In response to detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device performs ( 1114 ) a text selection operation, associated with the content between the first location and the second location, in accordance with the second press input. In some embodiments, the contact in the first press input, the movement across the touch-sensitive surface, and the second press input is a single continuous contact with the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., contact  924 , contact  925 , or contact  927 ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface: the device displays ( 1116 ) at least the portion of the text selection indicator at the second location within the content. For example, the device displays a cursor at the second location on the display ( FIG. 9U ) or displays an edge of a selection box at the second location on the display ( FIG. 9AA ), where the edge of the selection box corresponds to one end of the selected content. In some embodiments, the current location of the cursor corresponds to the current location of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, the text selection operation includes ( 1118 ) stopping selection of content at the second location and maintaining selection of the content between the first location and the second location (e.g.,  FIG. 9V ). 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the second press input and while the content between the first location and the second location remains selected, the device detects ( 1120 ) lift-off of the contact, and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact, the device displays an action menu. For example, after detecting the second press input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second location on the display (e.g., in the middle of the word “under”), the device detects lift-off of the contact from that location on the touch-sensitive surface without detecting further movement of the contact. In response, the device displays an action menu bar  940  or other area that shows actions that can be performed on the selected portion of the text input (e.g., copying, defining, cutting, pasting, etc.) for the selected content between the first location and the second location. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface and stopping the selection of the content at the second location, the device detects ( 1124 ) further movement of the contact. In response to detecting the further movement of the contact, the device displays at least a portion of the text selection indicator at a third location within the content. For example, in  FIG. 9W , after detecting the second press input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second location on the display (e.g., in  FIG. 9V , the press input at T 5  at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the middle of the word “under” on the display), the device detects further movement of the contact from that location on the touch-sensitive surface to another location on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., in  FIG. 9W , to a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the middle of the word “of” at T 6 ). In response, the device moves the cursor  922  or an edge of the selection box to the third location (e.g., to the middle of the word “of” in  FIG. 9W ) in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, the device cancels ( 1126 ) selection of content between the first location and the second location without selecting content between the second location and the third location ( FIG. 9W ). 
     In some embodiments, the text selection operation includes ( 1128 ) cancelling selection of content between the first location and the second location ( FIG. 9AB ). 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface and canceling the selection of content between the first location and the second location, the device detects ( 1130 ) further movement of the contact. In response to detecting the further movement of the contact, the device selects content between the second location and a third location ( FIGS. 9AB-9AC ). 
     In some embodiments, while the content between the second location and the third location is selected, the device detects ( 1132 ) lift-off of the contact (e.g., without detecting further movement of the contact). In response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the content between the second location and the third location is selected, the device stops selection of the content at the third location and maintains selection of the content between the second location and the third location (as shown in  FIGS. 9AC-9AD ). 
     In some embodiments, before displaying the text selection indicator at the first location within the content, the device detects ( 1134 ) an initial press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the initial press input, the device displays the text selection indicator at an initial location within the content that corresponds to a location of the initial press input on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the initial press input is ( 1136 ) detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of the content on the display. When the initial press input is detected at a location that corresponds to the first location within the content, the text selection indicator (e.g. the cursor  922 ) is displayed at the first location within the content. If the initial press input is detected at a location that does not correspond to the first location within the content, the text selection indicator is displayed at the first location within the content when the contact, after making the initial press input, moves to a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first location. For example, for a “first location” of position marker  945  in  FIG. 9R  (which corresponds to cursor  922 ) between the letters “n” and “a” in “nation,” the position marker was moved to this location after the initial press input shown in  FIG. 9Q  placed position marker  945  between the letters “r” and “o” in “from.” 
     In some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display that includes the touch-sensitive surface, and the device concurrently displays ( 1138 ), on the touch-sensitive display, the content and an onscreen keyboard. In some embodiments, the initial press input is detected on the onscreen keyboard ( FIG. 9A ). 
     In some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display that includes the touch-sensitive surface, and the device concurrently displays ( 1140 ), on the touch-sensitive display, the content and an onscreen keyboard. Before displaying the text selection indicator at the first location within the content, the device detects ( 1142 ) a multi-contact drag input (e.g., a two-finger drag input as shown in  FIG. 7B ) on the onscreen keyboard. In response to detecting the multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard, the device displays the text selection indicator at an initial location within the content based on a location of the multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard. In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 7B , the multi-contact drag input is detected on the onscreen keyboard, the keyboard is converted to a virtual trackpad as described with respect to  FIG. 9B , and the text selection indicator is displayed. Subsequent movement of the contact(s) in the multi-contact drag input on the virtual trackpad moves the text selection indicator within the content. 
     In some embodiments, the content includes ( 1144 ) editable content and the text selection indicator includes a cursor ( FIG. 9A ). In such embodiments, the device displays ( 1146 ) a magnifying loupe that displays a magnified version of the cursor and a region surrounding the cursor in response to a deep press, as shown in  FIG. 9Q . Further, when selecting the content between the first location and the second location, the device moves ( 1148 ) the cursor one character space at a time in response to detecting the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface and selects one additional character at a time in accordance with the movement of the cursor ( FIG. 9S ). 
     In some embodiments, the content includes ( 1150 ) read-only content and the text selection indicator includes a selection area (e.g., a rectangular selection box  929 ,  FIG. 9Z ). In such embodiments, displaying the text selection indicator at the first location includes displaying a first word (e.g., “Translation” in  FIG. 9Z ) located at the first location within the selection area. When selecting the read-only content between the first location and the second location, the device expands ( 1152 ) the selection area one word at a time in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface and selects one additional word at a time in accordance with the expansion of the selection area (e.g., “Translation: A U.S. Gift” in selection area  929  in  FIG. 9AA ). In some embodiments, the device displays ( 1154 ) a magnifying loupe that displays a magnified version of the selection area and a region surrounding the selection area. 
     In some embodiments, the device foregoes ( 1156 ) performing the text selection operation, in response to detecting the second press input, in accordance with a determination that the second press input is accompanied by simultaneous movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface. For example, the text selection operation is not performed when the device detects the second press input accompanied by simultaneous movement of the contact. In other words, movement cancels the operation that is typically triggered by the second press input. 
     In some embodiments, when the text is editable text, the text selection indicator is a cursor and selecting content between the first location and the second location includes ( 1158 ) expanding the selection character-by-character in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( FIG. 9S ); and when the text is non-editable text, the text selection indicator is a selection region that initially encompasses a single word and selecting content between the first location and the second location includes expanding the selection word-by-word in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( FIG. 9AA ). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 11A-11F  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  400  and  1000 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1100  described above with respect to  FIGS. 11A-11F . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1100  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  400  and  1000 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG. 12  shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  1200  configured in accordance with the principles of the invention as described above. The functional blocks of the device may be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the invention. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG. 12  may be combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the invention as described above. Therefore, the description herein may support any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  1200  includes a display unit  1202  configured to concurrently display an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the display unit  1202 , wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; a touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  configured to receive user touch inputs; one or more sensor units  1206  to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 ; and a processing unit  1208  coupled to the display unit  1202 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , and the one or more sensor units  1206 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  includes a detecting unit  1210 , a determining unit  1216 , an obscuring unit  1218 , a moving unit  1214 , and a selecting unit  1212 . 
     The processing unit  1208  is configured to: detect a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the display unit  1202 , determine whether the touch input satisfies one or more criteria for entering a text selection mode (e.g., with the determining unit  1216 ); and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode: concurrently display (e.g., with the displaying unit  1202 ), in the content presentation region, a first cursor at a first location and a second cursor at a second location that is different from the first location. 
     In some embodiments, the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the touch input including a two-finger drag gesture over the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the device has one or more sensor units  1206  to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display; the touch input on the touch-sensitive display includes an input by a contact on the onscreen keyboard, and the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode include the contact on the onscreen keyboard having an intensity that exceeds a predetermined deep press intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode: visually obscure keys on the onscreen keyboard (e.g., with the obscuring unit  1218 ). 
     In some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes applying a blurring effect to the onscreen keyboard (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes transforming the onscreen keyboard into an onscreen touchpad (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, visually obscuring the keys on the onscreen keyboard includes making the onscreen keyboard semitransparent to partially reveal content lying underneath the onscreen keyboard (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the second location is based on a location of an initial contact in the touch input; and the first location is a permitted insertion position in the content presentation region that is based on the second location. 
     In some embodiments, the first location is an insertion position at which the first cursor is located when the touch input is determined to satisfy the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode; and the second location is displaced from the first location by a predetermined offset. 
     In some embodiments, one of the first and second cursors is already displayed in the content presentation region before both of the first and second cursors are concurrently displayed in the content presentation region. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: detect movement of one or more contacts of the touch input (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and move the second cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the movement of the one or more contacts of the touch input (e.g., with the moving unit  1214 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: move the first cursor based on the movement of the second cursor, wherein movement of the first cursor includes discrete movements between permitted insertion positions in the content presentation region (e.g., with the moving unit  1214 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: detect a lift-off of the touch input after detecting the movement of the one or more contacts of the touch input (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input: cease to display the second cursor (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, maintain display of the first cursor at a respective permitted insertion position reached by the first cursor after the discrete movements of the first cursor (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, cease to display the first cursor (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the onscreen keyboard is obscured in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode, and the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in response to detecting the lift-off of the touch input, restore display of the onscreen keyboard (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the device has one or more sensor units  1206  to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , and the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in the text selection mode, detect that an intensity of a contact in the touch input exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold, detect movement of the contact in the touch input (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); in response to detecting the movement of the contact in the touch input, after detecting that the intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold: select a portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the selected portion of the text input begins at a position of the first cursor when the detected intensity of the contact in the touch input exceeded the predetermined intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: detect lift-off of the contact in the touch input after selecting the portion of the text input in accordance with the movement of the contact in the touch input (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact in the touch input, confirm selection of the portion of the text input (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detect an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold while the portion of the text input is selected, clear selection of the portion of the text input (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detect an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by lift-off of the contact without further movement of the contact, confirm selection of the portion of the text input (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: after selecting the portion of the text input, while the portion of the text input is selected, detect an intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by further movement of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact: clear selection of the portion of the text input (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact: start selection of a new portion of the text input in accordance with the further movement of the contact (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in response to detecting the intensity of the contact in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined threshold and that is followed by the further movement of the contact: further move the second cursor and the first cursor within the content presentation region in accordance with the further movement of the contact (e.g., with the moving unit  1214 ). 
     In some embodiments, the device has one or more sensor units ( 1206 ) to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display, and the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: in the text selection mode, detect a first local intensity peak in the touch input followed by a second local intensity peak in the touch input that both exceed a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak that both exceed the predetermined intensity threshold, select a first predetermined unit of the text input according to a current location of the first cursor (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is further configured to: after detecting the first local intensity peak followed by the second local intensity peak, detect a third consecutive local intensity peak in the touch input that exceeds the predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and in response to detecting the three consecutive local intensity peaks in the touch input that all exceed the predetermined deep press intensity threshold, select a second predetermined unit of the text input that is larger than and includes the first predetermined unit of the text input (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  1200  includes a display unit  1202  configured to, while a contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , concurrently display on the display unit  1202  content and a text selection indicator at a first location within the content; a touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  configured to receive user contacts; one or more sensor units  1206  to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 ; and a processing unit  1208  coupled to the display unit  1202 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , and the one or more sensor units  1206 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  includes a detecting unit  1210 , a determining unit  1216 , an obscuring unit  1218 , a moving unit  1214 , and a selecting unit  1212 . 
     The processing unit  1208  is configured to: detect a first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  that corresponds to movement of at least a portion of the text selection indicator from the first location to a second location on the display unit  1202  (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); in response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , select content between the first location and the second location (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ); while the content between the first location and the second location is selected, detect a second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); in response to detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, perform a text selection operation, associated with the content between the first location and the second location, in accordance with the second press input, wherein the contact in the first press input, the movement across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , and the second press input is a single continuous contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  includes: detecting an increase in intensity of the contact above a predetermined intensity threshold followed by detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity that remains above a predetermined minimum intensity value (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: in response to detecting the first press input by the contact followed by movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 : display at least the portion of the text selection indicator at the second location within the content (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, wherein the text selection operation includes stopping selection of content at the second location and maintaining selection of the content between the first location and the second location (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: after detecting the second press input and while the content between the first location and the second location remains selected, detect lift-off of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact, display an action menu for the selected content between the first location and the second location (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: after detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  and stopping the selection of the content at the second location, detect further movement of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, display at least a portion of the text selection indicator at a third location within the content (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, cancel selection of content between the first location and the second location without selecting content between the second location and the third location (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the text selection operation includes cancelling selection of content between the first location and the second location. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: after detecting the second press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit and canceling the selection of content between the first location and the second location, detect further movement of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the further movement of the contact, select content between the second location and a third location (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: while the content between the second location and the third location is selected, detect lift-off of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the content between the second location and the third location is selected, stop selection of the content at the third location and maintaining selection of the content between the second location and the third location (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: before displaying the text selection indicator at the first location within the content, detect an initial press input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and in response to detecting the initial press input, enable display of the text selection indicator at an initial location within the content that corresponds to a location of the initial press input on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 . 
     In some embodiments, the display unit  1202  is a touch-sensitive display that includes the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , and the processing unit  1208  is configured to: concurrently display, on the touch-sensitive display, the content and an onscreen keyboard, wherein the initial press input is detected on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the initial press input is detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  that corresponds to a location of the content on the display unit  1202 . 
     In some embodiments, the display unit  1202  is a touch-sensitive display that includes the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 , and the processing unit  1208  is configured to: concurrently enable display of, on the touch-sensitive display, the content and an onscreen keyboard; before displaying the text selection indicator at the first location within the content, detect a multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard (e.g., with the detecting unit  1210 ); and, in response to detecting the multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard, enable display of the text selection indicator at an initial location within the content based on a location of the multi-contact drag input on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the content includes editable content and the text selection indicator includes a cursor. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: enable display of a magnifying loupe that displays a magnified version of the cursor and a region surrounding the cursor. 
     In some embodiments, selecting the content between the first location and the second location includes: moving the cursor one character space at a time in response to detecting the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the moving unit  1214 ); and selecting one additional character at a time in accordance with the movement of the cursor (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the content includes read-only content and the text selection indicator includes a selection area; and displaying the text selection indicator at the first location includes displaying a first word located at the first location within the selection area (e.g., with the display unit  1202 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: enable display of a magnifying loupe that displays a magnified version of the selection area and a region surrounding the selection area. 
     In some embodiments, selecting the content between the first location and the second location includes: expanding the selection area one word at a time in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ); and selecting one additional word at a time in accordance with the expansion of the selection area (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: forego performing the text selection operation, in response to detecting the second press input, in accordance with a determination that the second press input is accompanied by simultaneous movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204 . 
     In some embodiments, when the text is editable text, the text selection indicator is a cursor and selecting content between the first location and the second location includes expanding the selection character-by-character in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ); and when the text is non-editable text, the text selection indicator is a selection region that initially encompasses a single word and selecting content between the first location and the second location includes expanding the selection word-by-word in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1204  (e.g., with the selecting unit  1212 ). 
     Turning to  FIGS. 13A-13Q , these figures illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selecting content, moving a text selection indicator, and changing keyboard appearance based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure), in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below with respect to  FIGS. 14A-14H .  FIGS. 13A-13Q  include intensity versus time diagrams that show the variations of a characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to a plurality of intensity thresholds (e.g., “IT D ”, “IT L ”, and “IT 0 ”). 
     In  FIG. 13A , editable content  1300  is displayed in a content presentation region  1302  while an application is in a document editing mode. The application runs on a device  100  that has one or more sensors (e.g., contact intensity sensor(s)  259 ,  FIG. 2B ) to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive display. In the document editing mode, an onscreen keyboard  1321  is displayed for text inputs. A user may enter text by touch inputs (e.g., by contact) on the onscreen keyboard  1321  and confirm completion of the editing by performing another touch input (e.g., a tap on “done” button) to exit the editing mode. An insertion marker (e.g., cursor  1322 ) is displayed to indicate a current location for text inputs. 
     When entering text into the content region  1302 , a character can be entered upon detecting a touchdown or liftoff event. In some embodiments, entering the text into the content region  1302  includes entering a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which touchdown of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard. For example, touchdown of the finger contact  1324  was detected on the character key “h”. In response to detecting the touchdown, character “h” is entered. In some embodiments, entering the text into the content region includes entering a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which liftoff of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard. For example, in response to liftoff of the finger contact  1324  from character key “h”, character “h” is entered. 
     In  FIG. 13B , at time T 1 , while in the editing mode and displaying the keyboard  1321 , the device detects a deep press by a finger contact  1324  on the onscreen keyboard  1321 , such that the intensity of the press input has increased above a text selection intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) before the movement of the contact is detected. In response to detecting the deep press, the appearance of the keyboard  1321  changes to indicate that the application has entered a text selection mode. In the text selection mode, the keyboard  1321  is not responsive to keystrokes, but rather serves as an onscreen touchpad or track pad for moving the cursor or selecting content. 
     In some embodiments, the press input is a stationary press input such that there is less than a threshold amount of movement between when touchdown of the finger contact  1324  is detected on the onscreen keyboard  1321  and when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact over the text selection intensity threshold IT D  is detected. In some embodiments, if more than the threshold amount of movement is detected, upon liftoff, a character entry operation is performed based on which character entry key the contact is over when liftoff of the contact is detected. 
     As shown in  FIG. 13B , in some embodiments, the keys are visually obscured. Visually obscuring keys on the keyboard  1321  provides an intuitive indication that the function of the keyboard  1321  has changed. In some embodiments, the onscreen keyboard  1321  is dimmed, faded, or blurred relative to the keyboard  1321  shown in  FIG. 13A  prior to detecting the deep press, such that the keys are no longer visible or clearly displayed as before. In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 13B , an indication of a location of the keys is maintained while the appearance of the characters is obscured (e.g., by maintaining display of the shapes of some or all of the keys on the keyboard while removing or blurring the characters on the key caps) and three-dimensional characteristics (e.g., a three-dimensional shape, drop shadow, etc.) of some or all of the keys are no longer visible. In some embodiments, the keyboard  1321  becomes semitransparent, to reveal content lying underneath the keyboard. 
     When the keyboard  1321  serves as an onscreen touch pad or track pad, in response to detecting finger movement  1332  started on the keyboard  1321 , text selection operations such as moving the cursor  1322  as shown in  FIG. 13B  within the content region  1302  or selecting text within the content region  1302  as shown in  FIGS. 13D-13Q  are performed. For example, after entering the text selection mode, upon detecting movement of the finger contact  1324  along a path  1332 , which started from the keyboard region  1321 , extended to the content region  1302 , and returned back to the keyboard region  1321 , the cursor  1322  is moved along a similar path in accordance with the movement of the finger contact  1324 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting movement of the contact after the touch input has satisfied the text selection criteria, instead of displaying cursor  1322  and cursor movement, a ghost cursor and a floating cursor are displayed, and the floating cursor is moved along a similar path in accordance with the movement of the finger contact  1324  as shown in  FIGS. 9B-9D  and described in greater detail above. 
       FIGS. 13C-13Q  illustrate a variety of possible text selection behaviors that can occur after entering text selection mode (e.g., after time T 1 ), in accordance with some embodiments. 
     Turning to  FIG. 13C , at the end of the text selection mode (e.g., detecting liftoff of the contact such that the intensity of the press input has fallen to zero), in response to detecting liftoff of the contact, the device exits the text selection mode of operation. In conjunction with the end of the text selection mode of operation, the device reverses the change in appearance of the onscreen keyboard  1321  to reveal the characters on the keys of the onscreen keyboard  1321 . As shown in  FIG. 13C , the device reverses a fading or blurring of the keyboard  1321  to indicate that the device is no longer in the text selection mode of operation. In some embodiments, three-dimensional characteristics (e.g., a three-dimensional shape, drop shadow, etc.) of some or all of the keys are restored, and the characters on the key caps are displayed. 
     In  FIG. 13D , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13B , while in the text selection mode, at time T 2 , when a cursor is located in the middle of the word “imperdiet” (not shown in  FIG. 13D ), the device detects a portion of the touch input (e.g., a second deep press with the same contact  1324 ), such that the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-start intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the selection-start intensity threshold is the same as, greater than, or less than the text selection intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) before the movement of the contact is detected. For illustration purpose, the selection-start intensity threshold is shown in  FIG. 13D  as IT D . 
     In response to detecting the second deep press by the same contact on the onscreen keyboard  1321  at time T 2 , the device begins to select a portion of the text input  1328  in accordance with the movement  1332  of the contact in the touch input. After time T 2 , during the movement  1332 , the intensity of the contact can be above or below the selection-start intensity threshold IT D . In some embodiments, the text selection starts when an increase in intensity of the contact is detected while the contact is substantially stationary (e.g., moves not more than a threshold distance within a threshold amount of time before the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the selection-start intensity threshold). 
     In  FIG. 13E , at time T 3 , the device detects lift-off of the contact in the touch input, such that the intensity of the contact is below a contact detection threshold. In response to detecting the lift-off of the contact, in some embodiments, the device confirms selection of the portion of the text input  1328 . In some embodiments, a selection box  1328  (e.g., a grey box) is displayed on the selected portion of the text input, and/or a menu bar  1340  is displayed that showing actions that can be performed on the selected portion of the text input (e.g., copying  1344 , defining, cutting  1342 , pasting, etc.). In some embodiments, the menu bar  1340  is displayed in response to a touch input on the selection box  1328 . Thus,  FIGS. 13D and 13E  illustrate using a substantially stationary deep press input by a contact  1324  to initiate text selection at time T 2 , then movement of the contact to select text, followed by lift-off of the contact to confirm the selection at time T 3 . 
     In  FIG. 13F , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13D , instead of detecting a lift-off of the contact, after time T 2  and while continuing to detect the contact  1324  on the touch-sensitive display  112 , the device detects a subsequent change in intensity of the contact (e.g. a substantially stationary deep press with the same contact) at time T 3 . Upon detecting the substantially stationary deep press at time T 3 , in accordance with a determination that the change in intensity of the contact satisfies selection-cancellation criteria, the device cancels the selection (e.g., deselecting the selected content and redisplaying the cursor). In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG. 13F , upon the selection cancellation, the cursor  1322  is displayed at the end of the selection (e.g., at the end of the word “enim”). In some embodiments, upon cancelling the selection, the cursor  1322  is displayed at the beginning of the selection. 
     In some embodiments, the selection-cancellation criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-cancellation intensity threshold (e.g., a threshold that is the same as, greater than, or less than the text-selection intensity threshold and/or the selection-start intensity threshold). For illustration purpose, the selection-cancellation intensity threshold shown in  FIG. 13F  is the same as the text-selection intensity threshold and the selection-start intensity threshold IT D . In some embodiments, the selection-cancellation criteria are met when an increase in intensity of the contact is detected while the contact is substantially stationary (e.g., the contact  1324  moves no more than a threshold distance within a threshold amount of time before the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the selection-cancellation intensity threshold). 
     In  FIG. 13G , following the substantially stationary deep press at time T 3  to cancel the selection and redisplay the cursor at the end of the word “enim”, while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive display  112  after time T 3 , the device detects a subsequent change in the intensity of the contact at time T 4 . In response to detecting the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at time T 4 ) satisfies the selection-start criteria described above with respect to  FIG. 13D , the device starts a new selection of content in the content region  1302  in accordance with the finger movement  1332 . The new selection starts at the end of the word “enim”, where the cursor  1332  was located when the deep press was detected at time T 4 , and expands character by character in accordance with the finger movement  1332 . Thus,  FIGS. 13D, 13F, and 13G  illustrate a first deep press by a contact  1324  to initiate a text selection at time T 2 , then movement of the contact  1324  to select text, followed by a second deep press with the same contact at time T 3  to cancel the text selection and display a cursor at the end of the selection, and a third deep press with the same contact at time T 4  to restart a new text selection. 
     In some embodiments, continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13F , the new text selection includes a selection of a respective word. When the third subsequent change detected at time T 4  includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the selection-start intensity threshold, a word is selected at the location of the cursor. For example, in  FIG. 13F , after the selection cancellation at time T 3 , the cursor  1332  is located at the end of the word “enim”. Subsequently, as shown in  FIG. 13H , the word “enim” is selected at the location of the cursor in response to detecting a deep press at time T 4 . 
     In  FIG. 13H , the deep press by contact  1324  is substantially stationary. Alternatively, in some embodiments, when the third subsequent change in the touch input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the selection-start intensity threshold followed by movement of the contact, selection is started at the location of the cursor and expanded character by character in accordance with the movement of the contact; and in response to a subsequent increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-start intensity threshold) within a threshold time, the current selection is expanded to include the entire word that was partially selected during the character-by-character expansion. 
     In  FIG. 13I , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13H , while the respective word “enim” is selected, a subsequent finger movement  1332  is detected after time T 4 . In response to detecting the subsequent finger movement  1332  while the respective word “enim” is selected, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-movement criteria, the selection of the first word “enim” is canceled, and a second word “imperdiet” is selected that is adjacent to the first word in a first direction (e.g., before or after the respective word) in accordance with the subsequent finger movement  1332 , such that the selected respective word is the second word “imperdiet”. As shown in  FIG. 13H , the subsequent finger movement  1332  is moving in a left/up direction. As a result, the word “imperdiet” that is before the word “enim” is selected. Conversely, in case a right/down finger movement is detected, a word after the word “enim” is selected. 
     In some embodiments, the selection-movement criteria include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount (e.g., the contact is not substantially stationary and optionally a respective time criterion that is met when an amount of time between the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the first subsequent movement of the contact is detected is less than a respective delay threshold). Thus,  FIGS. 13H and 13I  illustrate selecting a first word, cancels selection of the first word and selects a second word that is adjacent to a first word “enim” in a direction in accordance with the finger movement  1332 . 
     In  FIG. 13J , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13H , while the respective word “enim” is selected, a subsequent finger movement  1332  is detected. In response to detecting the subsequent finger movement  1332  while the respective word “enim” is selected, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria at time T 4 , the device expands the selection of the respective word “enim” to include a word “imperdiet” that is adjacent to the word “enim” in a direction of the finger movement  1332  (e.g., before or after the respective word “enim”) without selecting one or more words in the respective sentence “Numc viverra imperdiet enim.” that are adjacent to the respective word “enim” in the respective sentence in a direction that is different from the direction of the finger movement  1332 . In other words, the expansion only goes in the direction corresponding to the finger movement  1332 , and does not expand to include words in the reverse direction of the movement (e.g., as distinguished from expansion to select the whole sentence or more described below with respect to  FIGS. 13K-13Q ). In some embodiments, the selection expansion criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact moves more than the threshold amount (e.g., that the contact has remained stationary for at least a threshold amount of time prior to detecting the increase in intensity and that the increase in intensity was detected less than a threshold amount of time after detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact). Thus,  FIGS. 13H and 13J  illustrate selecting a word “enim” and expanding the selection word by word in a direction in accordance with the finger movement  1332 . 
     In  FIG. 13K , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13H , while the respective word “enim” is selected, the device detects another subsequent change in the intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-cancellation intensity threshold) at time T 5 . The touch input  1324  meets selection-cancellation criteria described above with respect to  FIG. 13F , the device cancels selection of the respective sentence and displays the cursor  1332  at the end of the selection. Thus,  FIGS. 13H and 13K  illustrate a deep press to select a word at time T 4  followed by another deep press at time T 5  to cancel the selection. 
     In  FIG. 13L , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13H , while the respective word “enim” is selected, the device detects another subsequent change in the intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-start intensity threshold) at time T 5 , such that the touch input  1324  meets sentence-selection criteria, e.g., the contact is substantially stationary before (e.g., just before) the subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected at time T 5  and the amount of time between T 4 , when the previous subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected, and T 5 , when the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected, is less than a delay threshold. In response to detecting such change in the touch input at time T 5 . (e.g., in response to detecting the subsequent change in the intensity of the contact at time T 5 ), the device expands the selection  1328  to include the (entire) respective sentence “Nunc viverra imperdiet enim.” that contains the respective word “enim”. Thus,  FIGS. 13H and 13L  illustrate a deep press at time T 4  to select a word followed by another deep press at time T 5  within a threshold time and while the contact remains substantially stationary, to expand the selection to a sentence containing the selected word. 
     In  FIG. 13M , while the respective sentence “Nunc viverra imperdiet enim.” is selected, the device detects a subsequent movement of the contact  1332 . In response to detecting the subsequent movement of the contact  1332  while the respective sentence is selected and in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria described above with respect to  FIG. 13J , the device expands the selection to include a sentence that is adjacent to the respective sentence in a first direction (e.g., before or after the respective sentence) in accordance with the subsequent movement of the contact (e.g., the expansion of the selection does not select one or more sentences in a respective paragraph that includes the respective sentence, that are adjacent to the respective sentence in the respective paragraph in a second direction that is different from the first direction). In other words, the expansion to include the sentence “Fusee posuere, magna sed pulvinar ultricies, purus lectus malesuada libero, sit amet commodo magna eros quis urna.” only goes in the direction corresponding to the movement of the contact  1332 , and does not expand to include in the reverse direction of the movement (e.g., as distinguished from expansion to select the whole paragraph or more described below). Thus,  FIGS. 13L and 13M  illustrate after a sentence selection at time T 5 , expanding the selection sentence by sentence in a direction in accordance with the finger movement  1332 . 
     In  FIG. 13N , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13L , in some embodiments, while the respective sentence “Nunc viverra imperdiet enim.” is selected, the device detects a subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-start intensity threshold) at time T 6 . In response to detecting the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at time T 6 , in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets the selection-cancellation criteria described above with respect to  FIG. 13F , the device cancels selection of the respective sentence and displays the cursor  1322  at the end of the selection. Thus,  FIGS. 13L and 13M  illustrate after a deep press to select a sentence at time T 5 , in response to another deep press at time T 6  (which is more than a threshold amount of time after T 5 ), the sentence selection is cancelled. 
     In  FIG. 13O , following the deep press at time T 5 , the device detects a subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-start intensity threshold) at time T 6 . In response to detecting the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at time T 6 , in accordance with a determination that the touch input  1324  (e.g., the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact detected at time T 6 ) meets paragraph-selection criteria (e.g., the paragraph-selection criteria include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period (e.g., is substantially stationary) before (e.g., just before) the subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected at T 6  and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the deep press is detected at time T 5  and when the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected at time T 6  is less than the delay threshold), the device expands the selection to include the (entire) respective paragraph that contains the respective sentence. Thus,  FIGS. 13L and 13O  illustrate after a deep press to select a sentence at time T 5 , in response to detecting another deep press that meets paragraph-selection criteria, the sentence selection is expanded to a paragraph containing the sentence. 
     In  FIG. 13P , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13O , while the respective paragraph is selected, the device detects subsequent movement of the contact  1332  after time T 6 . In response to detecting the subsequent movement of the contact while the respective paragraph is selected, in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the movement detected at time T 6 ) meets selection-expansion criteria described above with respect to  FIG. 13J , the device expands the selection to include a paragraph that is adjacent to the respective paragraph in a first direction (e.g., before or after the respective paragraph) in accordance with the subsequent movement of the contact  1332 . 
     For example, in  FIG. 13P , the expansion of the selection does not select one or more paragraph in a respective document that includes the respective paragraph, that are adjacent to the respective paragraph in the respective document in a second direction that is different from the first direction. In other words, the expansion only goes in the direction corresponding to the movement of the contact, and does not expand to include in the reverse direction of the movement (e.g., as distinguished from expansion to select the whole document described below). Thus,  FIGS. 13O and 13P  illustrate after a paragraph selection, expanding the selection paragraph by paragraph in a direction in accordance with the finger movement  1332 . 
     In  FIG. 13Q , continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13O , while the respective paragraph is selected, the device detects a subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-start intensity threshold) at time T 7 . In response to detecting the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at time T 7 , in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at T 7 ) meets selection-cancellation criteria (e.g., the deep press detected at T 7  is more than a threshold amount of time after the deep press detected at T 6 ) described above with respect to  FIG. 13F , the device cancels selection of the respective paragraph. Thus,  FIGS. 13O and 13Q  illustrate after a paragraph selection, in response to detecting a subsequent deep press that meets selection-cancellation criteria, cancelling the paragraph selection. 
     Though not shown in figures, continuing the example shown in  FIG. 13O , while the respective paragraph is selected, the selected paragraph can be expanded to the entire document that contains the selected paragraph in response to detecting a subsequent deep press at T 7  after time T 6 . The subsequent deep press is a subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact such that the subsequent change meets document-selection criteria, which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period (e.g., is substantially stationary) before (e.g., just before) the subsequent deep press was detected, and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the deep press is detected at time T 6  and when the subsequent deep press is detected at T 7  is less than the delay threshold. 
       FIGS. 14A-14H  illustrate a flow diagram of method  1400  of content manipulation in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1400  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with one or more processors, memory, and a display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1400  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, method  1400  provides an efficient way to manipulate a cursor. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when using a cursor, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to manipulate a cursor faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device concurrently displays ( 1402 ) an onscreen keyboard (e.g., keyboard  1321 ,  FIG. 13A ) and a content presentation region (e.g., region  1302 ,  FIG. 13A ) on the touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard ( FIG. 13A ). The device further detects ( 1404 ) a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., by finger contact  1324 ,  FIG. 13A ). In some embodiments, detecting the touch input includes detecting movement of a contact (e.g.,  FIGS. 13B and 13D  etc.) and liftoff of the contact (e.g.,  FIGS. 13C and 13E ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting ( 1406 ) the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies text-selection criteria, the text-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a text-selection intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press with contact characteristic intensity increases above IT D  at time T 1 ,  FIG. 13B ), the device performs ( 1408 ) a text selection operation based on the movement of the contact ( FIGS. 13D-13Q ). In some embodiments, the text-selection criteria include ( 1410 ) a criterion that is met when the contact does not move more than a threshold distance before detect an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the text-selection intensity threshold (e.g., the finger contact  1324  is substantially stationary at time T 1 , there is less than a threshold amount of movement between when touchdown of the contact  1324  is detected on the onscreen keyboard and when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact over the text-selection intensity threshold is detected at time T 1 ,  FIG. 13B ). In some embodiments, if more than the threshold amount of movement is detected, upon liftoff, a character entry operation is performed based on which character entry key the contact is over when liftoff of the contact is detected. In some embodiments, the text-selection operation includes ( 1412 ) one of: moving a cursor within the content region (as shown in  FIG. 13B ) or selecting text within the content region (e.g., as shown in  FIGS. 13D-13Q ). 
     In addition to text-selection operations, in response to detecting ( 1406 ) the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies text-entry criteria (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13A ), the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the text-selection intensity threshold, the device enters ( 1414 ) text into the content presentation region based on the touch input (e.g., entering text when the contact characteristic intensity does not increase above IT D ,  FIG. 13A ). In some embodiments, the text-entry criteria include ( 1416 ) a criterion that is met when the liftoff of the contact is detected while the contact is at a location of a character key of the onscreen keyboard. In some embodiments, the text-entry criteria include ( 1418 ) a criterion that is met when the contact does not move outside of the onscreen keyboard before liftoff of the contact is detected. In some embodiments, entering the text into the content region includes ( 1420 ) entering a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which touchdown of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard (e.g., entering character “h” when a touchdown of the contact  1324  is detected,  FIG. 13A ). In some embodiments, entering the text into the content region includes ( 1422 ) entering a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which liftoff of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard (e.g., entering character “h” when a liftoff of the contact  1324  is detected,  FIG. 13A ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the text-selection criteria have been met, the device generates ( 1424 ) a tactile output (e.g., with one or more tactile output generating components of the device,  167  in  FIG. 2A and/or 257  in  FIG. 2B ) that is indicative of an entry into a text selection mode of operation. In some embodiments, the tactile output that is indicative of entry into the text selection mode of operation is different from the tactile output that is generated when a device alert such as a notification of an incoming message is provided by the device. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the text-selection criteria have been met, the device changes ( 1426 ) an appearance of the onscreen keyboard to indicate that the device is operating in a text selection mode of operation. In some embodiments, changing the appearance of the onscreen keyboard includes obscuring an appearance of characters on keys of the onscreen keyboard (e.g., blurring in  FIG. 9N , fading, and/or removing the characters on the key caps in  FIG. 13B ). In some embodiments, an indication of a location of the keys is maintained while the appearance of the characters is obscured (e.g., by maintaining display of the shapes of some or all of the keys on the keyboard while removing or blurring the characters on the key caps and the drop shadows of the key caps,  FIG. 13B ). In some embodiments, the device ends ( 1428 ) the text selection mode of operation (e.g., detecting liftoff of the contact and, in response to detecting liftoff of the contact, exiting the text selection mode of operation,  FIGS. 13C and 13E ) and, in conjunction with the end of the text selection mode of operation, the device reverses the change in appearance of the onscreen keyboard to reveal the characters on the keys of the onscreen keyboard (e.g., reversing a fading, blurring of the keyboard to indicate that the device is no longer in the text selection mode of operation,  FIGS. 13C and 13E ). 
     In some embodiments, when the touch input satisfies the text-selection criteria, the device detects ( 1430 ) movement of the contact after the touch input has satisfied the text-selection criteria and moving a cursor ( FIG. 13B ) in the content region in accordance with the movement of the contact detected after the touch input has satisfied the text-selection criteria. In some embodiments, instead of displaying a cursor and moving the cursor, a ghost cursor and a floating cursor are displayed and moved in the content region in accordance with the movement of the contact, as described in greater detail above with respect to  FIGS. 9B-9D . 
     In some embodiments, when the touch input satisfies the text-selection criteria, the device detects ( 1432 ) a first subsequent change (e.g., a deep press at time T 2 ,  FIG. 13D ) in the characteristic intensity of the contact (optionally, after first detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity below the text-selection intensity threshold) followed by additional movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive display. In response to detecting ( 1434 ) the first subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and in accordance with a determination that the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, the selection-start criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-start intensity threshold (e.g., a threshold that is the same as, greater than, or less than the text-selection intensity threshold IT D  before the movement of the contact is detected,  FIG. 13D ), the device starts ( 1436 ) to select content in the content region at a location of a cursor in accordance with the additional movement of the contact (e.g., starting the selection at the location of the cursor and expand the selection character by character in accordance with the movement of the contact as shown in  FIG. 13G ; or start selection at the word at the location of the cursor, and expand the selection word by word in accordance with the movement of the contact as shown in  FIGS. 13H and 13J ). On the other hand, in accordance with a determination that the touch input does not satisfy the selection-start criteria, the device moves the cursor in accordance with the additional movement of the contact without starting to select content in the content region ( FIG. 13B ). In some embodiments, the selection-start criteria are met when an increase in intensity of the contact is detected while the contact is substantially stationary (e.g., moves not more than a threshold distance within a threshold amount of time before the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the selection-start intensity threshold). 
     In some embodiments, when the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, after starting to select content in the content region, the device detects ( 1438 ) liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive display and confirms the selection in response to detecting the liftoff of the contact (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13E ). 
     Alternatively, when the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, after starting to select content in the content region, and while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive display, the device detects ( 1440 ) a second subsequent change in intensity of the contact (e.g., a deep press at time T 3  in  FIG. 13F ). In response to detecting ( 1442 ) the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and in accordance with a determination that the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact satisfies selection-cancellation criteria, the selection-cancellation criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-cancellation intensity threshold (e.g., a threshold that is the same as, greater than, or less than the text-selection intensity threshold and/or the selection-start intensity threshold IT D ), the device cancels ( 1444 ) the selection (e.g., deselecting the selected content and redisplaying the cursor, as shown in  FIG. 13F ). On the other hand, in response to detecting the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and in accordance with a determination that the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact does not satisfy the selection-cancellation criteria (e.g., if the contact did not reach the selection-cancellation intensity threshold and/or the contact was not substantially stationary when the selection-cancellation intensity threshold was reached), the device maintains the selection (e.g., and expanding the selection or contracting the selection in accordance with continued movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive display, as shown in  FIG. 13D ). In some embodiments, the selection-cancellation criterion include ( 1446 ) a criterion that is met when the contact moves no more than a threshold distance within a threshold amount of time before the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the selection-cancellation intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the selection-cancellation criteria have been met, the device generates ( 1448 ) a tactile output (e.g., with one or more tactile output generating components of the device,  167  in  FIG. 2A and/or 257  in  FIG. 2B ) that is indicative of an exit from the text selection mode of operation. In some embodiments, the tactile output that is indicative of exit from the text selection mode of operation is different from the tactile output that is generated when a device alert such as a notification of an incoming message is provided by the device. In some embodiments, this tactile output is not generated when corresponding selection cancellation operations are performed in the text (as opposed to being performed on the keyboard). 
     In some embodiments, after canceling the selection, and while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive display, the device detects ( 1450 ) a third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., a deep press at time T 4  in  FIG. 13G ). In response to detecting ( 1452 ) the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact) satisfies the selection-start criteria, the device starts ( 1454 ) to select content in the content region at a location of the cursor (as shown in  FIG. 13G ). On the other hand, in response to detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact) does not satisfy the selection-start criteria, the device forgoes starting to select content in the content region. 
     In some embodiments, starting to select content in response to detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact includes ( 1456 ) selecting a respective word at the location of the cursor (as shown in  FIG. 13H ). For example, after the cancellation of the selection (e.g., in response to a deep press at time T 3  in  FIG. 13F ), when the third subsequent change includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the selection-start intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press at time T 4  in  FIG. 13H ), a word is selected at the location of the cursor (as shown in  FIG. 13H ). 
     In some embodiments, the selected respective word is ( 1458 ) a first word (e.g., the word “enim” is the selected first word,  FIG. 13H ). In some embodiments, while the first word is selected, the device detects first subsequent movement of the contact ( 13 I). In response to detecting the first subsequent movement of the contact while the first word is selected and in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-movement criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount (e.g., the contact is not substantially stationary and optionally a respective time criterion that is met when an amount of time between the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the first subsequent movement of the contact is detected is less than a respective delay threshold), the device cancels selection of the first word and selects a second word that is adjacent to the first word in a first direction (e.g., before or after the respective word) in accordance with the first subsequent movement of the contact, such that the selected respective word is the second word (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13I ). 
     In some embodiments, instead of selecting a second word that is adjacent to the first word, while the respective word is selected (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13H ), the device detects ( 1460 ) first subsequent movement of the contact (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13J ). In response to detecting the first subsequent movement of the contact while the respective word is selected and in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount (e.g., the contact is not substantially stationary and optionally a respective time criterion that is met when an amount of time between the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the first subsequent movement of the contact is detected is less than a respective delay threshold), the device expands the selection to include a word that is adjacent to the respective word in a first direction (e.g., before or after the respective word) in accordance with the first subsequent movement of the contact (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13J ). 
     In some embodiments, instead of selecting a second word that is adjacent to the first word or expanding the selection word by word in respect to detecting a subsequent movement of the contact, while the respective word is selected, the device detects ( 1462 ) a fourth subsequent change (e.g., a deep press at time T 5 , as shown in  FIG. 13K ) in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-cancellation intensity threshold). In response to detecting the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at time T 5 ) meets the selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold (e.g., and, optionally, that the contact is substantially stationary), the device cancels selection of the respective word (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13K ). 
     In some embodiments, instead of canceling a selected word in response to a fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold, while the respective word is selected, the device detects ( 1464 ) a fourth subsequent change (e.g., a deep press at time T 5 ,  FIG. 13L ) in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., the sentence-selection intensity threshold). In response to detecting the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input (e.g., the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact at time T 5 ) meets sentence-selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than a threshold amount within a threshold time period (e.g., the contact is substantially stationary) before (e.g., just before) the fourth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than a delay threshold, the device expands the selection to include the (entire) respective sentence that contains the respective word (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13L ). 
     In some embodiments, while the respective sentence is selected, the device detects ( 1466 ) second subsequent movement of the contact (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13M ). In response to detecting the second subsequent movement of the contact while the respective sentence is selected: in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount (e.g., the contact is not substantially stationary and optionally a respective time criterion that is met when an amount of time between the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the second subsequent movement of the contact is detected is less than a respective delay threshold), the device expands the selection to include a sentence that is adjacent to the respective sentence in a first direction (e.g., before or after the respective sentence) in accordance with the second subsequent movement of the contact (e.g., the expansion of the selection does not select one or more sentences in a respective paragraph that includes the respective sentence, that are adjacent to the respective sentence in the respective paragraph in a second direction that is different from the first direction (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13M ). 
     In some embodiments, instead of expanding the sentence selection in response to a subsequent movement of the contact, while the respective sentence is selected, the device detects ( 1468 ) a fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the selection-start intensity threshold) (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13N ). In response to detecting the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets the selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold (e.g., and, optionally, that the contact is substantially stationary), the device cancels selection of the respective sentence (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13N ). 
     In some embodiments, instead of canceling the sentence selection, in response to detecting a subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in response to detecting the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets paragraph-selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period (e.g., is substantially stationary) before (e.g., just before) the fifth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than the delay threshold, the device expands ( 1470 ) the selection to include the (entire) respective paragraph that contains the respective sentence (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13O ). 
     In some embodiments, while the respective paragraph is selected, the device detects ( 1472 ) third subsequent movement of the contact. In response to detecting the third subsequent movement of the contact while the respective paragraph is selected: in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount, the device expands the selection to include a paragraph that is adjacent to the respective paragraph in a first direction in accordance with the third subsequent movement of the contact (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13P ). 
     In some embodiments, the respective paragraph is selected in response to the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact. While the respective paragraph is selected: the device detects ( 1474 ) a sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets selection-cancellation  138 - 156  criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, the device cancels selection of the respective paragraph (e.g., as shown in  FIG. 13Q ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the touch input meets document selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period before the sixth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than the delay threshold, the device expands ( 1476 ) the selection to include the respective document that contains the respective paragraph. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 14A-14H  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  400 ,  1000 , and  1100 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1400  described above with respect to  FIGS. 14A-14H . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1400  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  400 ,  1000 , and  1100 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG. 15  shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  1500  configured in accordance with the principles of the invention as described above. The functional blocks of the device may be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the invention. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG. 15  may be combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the invention as described above. Therefore, the description herein may support any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  1500  includes a display unit  1502  configured to concurrently display an onscreen keyboard and a content presentation region on the display unit  1502 , wherein the content presentation region displays text input received from the onscreen keyboard; a touch-sensitive surface unit  1504  configured to receive user touch inputs; one or more sensor units  1506  to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1504 ; and a processing unit  1508  coupled to the display unit  1502 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  1504 , and the one or more sensor units  1506 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  includes a detecting unit  1510 , a selecting unit  1512 , a moving unit  1514 , a determining unit  1516 , and a changing appearance unit  1518 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1208  is configured to: in accordance with the determination that the touch input satisfies the one or more criteria for entering the text selection mode: visually obscure keys on the onscreen keyboard (e.g., with the obscuring unit  1218 ). 
     The processing unit  1508  is configured to: detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) the touch input includes detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) movement of a contact and liftoff of the contact. The processing unit  1508  is also configured to: in response to detecting the touch input on the onscreen keyboard displayed on the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input satisfies text-selection criteria, the text-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a text-selection intensity threshold, perform a text selection operation (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) based on the movement of the contact. Conversely, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input satisfies text-entry criteria, the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the text-selection intensity threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to enter text into the content presentation region based on the touch input. 
     In some embodiments, the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the liftoff of the contact is detected while the contact is at a location of a character key of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the text-entry criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact does not move outside of the onscreen keyboard before liftoff of the contact is detected. 
     In some embodiments, enter the text into the content region includes enter a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which touchdown of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, enter the text into the content region includes enter a character that corresponds to character key at a location at which liftoff of the contact was detected on the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the text-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact does not move more than a threshold distance before detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the text-selection intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the text-selection operation includes one of: moving a cursor within the content region or selecting text within the content region. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, in response to detecting that the text-selection criteria have been met, generate a tactile (e.g., with tactile output generator(s)  167 ,  FIG. 2A  or tactile output generator(s)  257 ,  FIG. 2B ) output that is indicative of an entry into a text selection mode of operation. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, in response to detecting that the text-selection criteria have been met, change an appearance (e.g., with changing appearance unit  1518 ) of the onscreen keyboard to indicate that the device is operating in a text selection mode of operation. In some embodiments, change the appearance (e.g., with changing appearance unit  1518 ) of the onscreen keyboard includes obscure an appearance (e.g., with changing appearance unit  1518 ) of characters on keys of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to end the text selection mode of operation and, in conjunction with the end of the text selection mode of operation, reverse the change in appearance (e.g., with changing appearance unit  1518 ) of the onscreen keyboard to reveal the characters on the keys of the onscreen keyboard. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, when the touch input satisfies the text-selection criteria, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) movement of the contact after the touch input has satisfied the text-selection criteria and move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 ) a cursor in the content region in accordance with the movement of the contact detected after the touch input has satisfied the text-selection criteria. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, when the touch input satisfies the text-selection criteria, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a first subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact followed by additional movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive display; and, in response to detecting the first subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, the selection-start criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-start intensity threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to start to select (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) content in the content region at a location of a cursor in accordance with the additional movement of the contact. Conversely, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input does not satisfy the selection-start criteria, the processing unit  1508  is configured to move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 ) the cursor in accordance with the additional movement of the contact without starting to select content in the content region. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to: when the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, after starting to select content in the content region, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive display and confirm the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) in response to detecting the liftoff of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to: when the touch input satisfies selection-start criteria, after starting to select content in the content region, and while continuing to detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) the contact on the touch-sensitive display, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a second subsequent change in intensity of the contact. In response to detecting the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact satisfies selection-cancellation criteria, the selection-cancellation criteria include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a selection-cancellation intensity threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to cancel the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ). Conversely, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the second subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact does not satisfy the selection-cancellation criteria, the processing unit  1508  is configured to maintain the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ). 
     In some embodiments, the selection-cancellation criterion include a criterion that is met when the contact moves no more than a threshold distance within a threshold amount of time before the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the selection-cancellation intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, in response to detecting that the selection-cancellation criteria have been met, generate a tactile (e.g., with tactile output generator(s)  167 ,  FIG. 2A  or tactile output generator(s)  257 ,  FIG. 2B ) output that is indicative of an exit from the text selection mode of operation. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to: after canceling the selection, and while continuing to detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) the contact on the touch-sensitive display, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact. In response to detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input satisfies the selection-start criteria, the processing unit  1508  is configured to start to select (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) content in the content region at a location of the cursor. Conversely, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input does not satisfy the selection-start criteria, the processing unit  1508  is configured to forgo starting to select content (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) in the content region. 
     In some embodiments, start to select (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) content in response to detecting the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact includes select (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) a respective word at the location of the cursor. 
     In some embodiments, the selected respective word is a first word, and the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the first word is selected, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) first subsequent movement of the contact. In response to detecting the first subsequent movement of the contact while the first word is selected, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets selection-movement criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 )s more than a respective threshold amount, the processing unit  1508  is configured to cancel selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) of the first word, and select (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) a second word that is adjacent to the first word in a first direction in accordance with the first subsequent movement of the contact, such that the selected respective word is the second word. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective word is selected, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) first subsequent movement of the contact. In response to detecting the first subsequent movement of the contact while the respective word is selected, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact moves more than a respective threshold amount, the processing unit  1508  is configured to expand the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) to include a word that is adjacent to the respective word in a first direction in accordance with the first subsequent movement of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective word is selected, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold. In response to detecting the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets the selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to cancel selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) of the respective word. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective word is selected, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold. In response to detecting the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets sentence-selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 )s less than a threshold amount within a threshold time period before the fourth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the third subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than a delay threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to expand the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) to include the respective sentence that contains the respective word. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective sentence is selected, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) second subsequent movement of the contact. In response to detecting the second subsequent movement of the contact while the respective sentence is selected, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 )s more than a respective threshold amount, the processing unit  1508  is configured to expand the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) to include a sentence that is adjacent to the respective sentence in a first direction in accordance with the second subsequent movement of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, the respective sentence is selected in response to the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective sentence is selected: detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold. In response to detecting the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets the selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to cancel selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) of the respective sentence. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, in response to detecting the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets paragraph-selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 )s less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period before the fifth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the fourth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than the delay threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to expand the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) to include the respective paragraph that contains the respective sentence. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective paragraph is selected, detecting third subsequent movement of the contact. In response to detecting the third subsequent movement of the contact while the respective paragraph is selected, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets selection-expansion criteria which includes a movement criterion that is met when the contact move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 )s more than a respective threshold amount, expand the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) to include a paragraph that is adjacent to the respective paragraph in a first direction in accordance with the third subsequent movement of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, the respective paragraph is selected in response to the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact and the processing unit  1508  is configured to, while the respective paragraph is selected, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1510 ) a sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold. In response to detecting the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets selection-cancellation criteria, which includes a criterion that is met when the amount of time between when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is greater than the delay threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to cancel selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) of the respective paragraph. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  1508  is configured to, in response to detecting the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  1516 ) that the touch input meets document selection criteria which include a movement criterion that is met when the contact move (e.g., with moving unit  1514 )s less than the threshold amount within the threshold time period before the sixth subsequent change in intensity of the contact was detected and a time criterion that is met when an amount of time between when the fifth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected and when the sixth subsequent change in the characteristic intensity of the contact is detected is less than the delay threshold, the processing unit  1508  is configured to expand the selection (e.g., with selecting unit  1512 ) to include the respective document that contains the respective paragraph. 
     The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

Metadata:
Filing Date: 20170427
Publication Date: 20190305
Grant Date: 20190305
Priority Date: 20150319
Inventors: ALONSO RUIZ, MARCOS
LEMAY, STEPHEN O.
JON, TIFFANY S.
KING, NICHOLAS V.
CHAUDHRI, IMRAN A.
COFFMAN, PATRICK L.
WINER, MORGAN H.
FETTES, ALASTAIR K.
JONG, NICHOLAS K.
Assignee: APPLE INC
CPC Classifications: [{"code": "G06F3/04812", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04812", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/03547", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04812", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04886", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04845", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04812", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/03547", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04845", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04886", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}]
Family ID: 55795259